Please read these instructions carefully before using this product,
and save this manual for future use.
Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual
for advanced features
Digital Camera
Model No.
DC-G97
DVQP3210ZB
F0125MZ1045
until
2025/2/1
Message Display P297
Troubleshooting P299
Finding the information you need P2
Contents P4
Contents by Function P10
Menu Guide P190
Register online at
http://shop.panasonic.com/support/register
(U.S. customers only)
DVQP3210~Cover_eng.fm 1 ページ ２０２５年３月３１日 月曜日 午後２時５４分
2
About Operating Instructions
This document, “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual for advanced features”,
includes detailed explanations of all the functions and operations of the camera.
• The external design and specifications of this product, as described in this document, may
differ from the actual product.
• Illustrations used in this document may differ from the actual product and the actual images
displayed on the product.
• Images used in this document are sample pictures used to explain the functions and effects.
Finding the information you need
In this “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual for advanced features”, you can find
the information you need from the following pages.
By clicking a page number, you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the
information.
Search from “Contents”
Click this icon to jump to “Contents”.
P4
Search from the list of function names P10
Search from the list of buttons and dials P17
Search from the list of screens and icons P290
Search from “Message Display” P297
Search from “Menu Guide”
Click this icon to jump to “Menu Guide”.
P190
Search from “Troubleshooting” P299
Click this icon to jump to “About Operating Instructions”.
Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page.
3
How to use this manual
∫ About the symbols in the text
• Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page.
• Description in these operating instructions is based on the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060).
About the indication of the applicable mode
Applicable modes:
The icons indicate the modes available for a function.
• Black icons: Applicable modes
• Gray icons: Unavailable modes
will differ depending on the Recording Modes registered under custom settings.
: Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing [MENU/SET] button.
: Tips for skillful use and points for recording.
: Conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Steps for setting a menu item are described as follows.
Example: In the [Rec] menu, change [Quality] from [ ] to [ ]
> [Rec] > [Quality] > []
MENU
MENU
4
Contents
About Operating Instructions ....................................................................................2
Finding the information you need..............................................................................2
How to use this manual.............................................................................................3
Contents by Function ..............................................................................................10
1. Before Use
Care of the camera .................................................................................................13
Standard Accessories .............................................................................................15
Names and Functions of Components....................................................................17
About the Lens ........................................................................................................20
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Attaching the Shoulder Strap ..................................................................................21
Charging the Battery ...............................................................................................22
• Battery Insertion .............................................................................................22
• Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging...........................................24
Inserting the Card (Optional)...................................................................................28
Card Information .....................................................................................................30
• Formatting the card (initialization) ..................................................................30
Attaching a Lens .....................................................................................................31
Changing the Monitor Position ................................................................................34
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time) .........................................35
Basic Operations.....................................................................................................37
• How to Hold the Camera ................................................................................37
• Using the Viewfinder.......................................................................................38
• Shutter button (Taking pictures) .....................................................................39
• Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures).........................................40
• Mode dial (Selecting a Recording Mode) .......................................................40
• Front Dial/Rear Dial........................................................................................41
• Control Dial.....................................................................................................43
• Cursor buttons/[MENU/SET] button ...............................................................44
• [DISP.] button (switching the information display) ..........................................44
• Touch screen (Touch operations) ...................................................................48
• Taking Pictures Using the Touch Function .....................................................49
Setting menu items .................................................................................................51
Quick Menu.............................................................................................................54
• Customizing the Quick Menu settings ............................................................55
Fn Buttons...............................................................................................................56
Entering Text ...........................................................................................................60
5
Contents
3. Recording Modes
Easy Recording (Intelligent Auto Mode)..................................................................61
• [Intelligent Auto] menu....................................................................................64
• Taking pictures with customized color, defocus control,
and brightness settings ..................................................................................65
Program AE Mode ..................................................................................................67
Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/Shutter Speed.....................................68
• Aperture-Priority AE Mode .............................................................................69
• Shutter-Priority AE Mode................................................................................69
• Manual Exposure Mode .................................................................................70
• Bulb recording ................................................................................................71
• Live View Composite Recording.....................................................................72
• Preview Mode.................................................................................................74
• One Push AE..................................................................................................75
Custom Mode..........................................................................................................76
• Registering custom settings ...........................................................................76
• Using Custom Mode.......................................................................................76
Scene Guide Mode .................................................................................................77
Creative Control Mode ............................................................................................80
• Types of image effects....................................................................................81
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Using AF .................................................................................................................86
• Setting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFF/AFC) .......................................................88
• [AF Sensitivity(Photo)]....................................................................................89
Selecting the AF Mode............................................................................................90
• AF area movement operation.........................................................................95
• Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Pad ......................................98
• Adjusting focus and brightness for the touched position ................................99
Record Using MF ..................................................................................................100
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) .........................................................103
Exposure Compensation.......................................................................................104
Setting the ISO Sensitivity ....................................................................................106
Setting the White Balance (WB)............................................................................108
• Finely adjusting the White Balance ..............................................................110
6
Contents
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
Select a Drive Mode.............................................................................................. 111
Taking Pictures using Burst Mode.........................................................................112
4K Photo Recording..............................................................................................115
• Notes on the 4K Photo function....................................................................118
Selecting pictures from 4K burst file......................................................................121
• Operations during selecting pictures ............................................................122
Post Focus Recording...........................................................................................126
• Selecting the Focus Position for the Picture to Save ...................................128
• Focus Stacking .............................................................................................129
Taking Pictures with Time Lapse Shot/
Stop Motion Animation ..........................................................................................131
• [Time Lapse Shot] ........................................................................................131
• Recording with Stop Motion Animation.........................................................133
• Motion pictures using Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation ..................135
Recording Using the Self-timer .............................................................................136
Bracket Recording ................................................................................................137
• Exposure Bracket .........................................................................................138
• Aperture Bracket ..........................................................................................139
• Focus Bracket ..............................................................................................139
• White Balance Bracket .................................................................................140
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Image Stabilizer.....................................................................................................141
• Image Stabilizer Settings..............................................................................143
• Setting the focal length of a lens ..................................................................144
Taking Pictures with the Zoom ..............................................................................146
• Optical zoom ................................................................................................146
• Raising the telescopic effect.........................................................................147
• Zooming using touch operations (Touch zoom) ...........................................151
Using a Flash ........................................................................................................152
Setting Flash Functions ........................................................................................155
• [Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]............................................................155
• [Flash Mode].................................................................................................156
• [Flash Synchro] ............................................................................................158
• Adjusting the Flash Output ...........................................................................159
• [Auto Exposure Comp.] ................................................................................159
Recording Using a Wireless Flash........................................................................160
• Using other settings for wireless flash recording..........................................162
7
Contents
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Recording Motion Picture......................................................................................163
• [Rec Quality].................................................................................................165
• [Continuous AF]............................................................................................167
• [AF Custom Setting(Video)]..........................................................................168
• Log recording (V-Log L)................................................................................168
• Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures...............................169
• [Snap Movie] ................................................................................................170
• Displaying/Setting the Sound Recording Level ............................................173
Creative Video Mode.............................................................................................174
• [4K Live Cropping]........................................................................................176
Slow & Quick Mode...............................................................................................178
• Slow & Quick Menu ......................................................................................179
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Pictures ...........................................................................................182
Playing Back Motion Pictures................................................................................183
• Extracting a Picture ......................................................................................184
Switching the Display Mode..................................................................................185
• Enlarged Display ..........................................................................................185
• Thumbnail Screen ........................................................................................185
• Calendar Playback .......................................................................................186
Group Images .......................................................................................................187
Deleting Images ....................................................................................................189
9. Menu Guide
Menus that are only available for particular Recording Modes .............................190
[Rec] menu............................................................................................................191
[Motion Picture] menu ...........................................................................................207
[Custom] menu......................................................................................................210
[Setup] menu.........................................................................................................226
[My Menu] menu ...................................................................................................236
[Playback] menu ...................................................................................................237
8
Contents
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
®
function/Bluetooth
®
function .......................................................................254
Connecting to a smartphone.................................................................................255
• Installing “LUMIX Sync” ...............................................................................255
• Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection)..................................256
• Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]) .......................................259
Operating the Camera with a Smartphone............................................................261
• [Remote shooting] ........................................................................................262
• [Shutter Remote Control]..............................................................................263
• [Import images].............................................................................................265
• [Auto Transfer]..............................................................................................266
• [Location Logging] ........................................................................................267
• [Remote Wakeup].........................................................................................268
• [Auto Clock Set]............................................................................................268
Sending images to a smartphone .........................................................................269
• Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone
with Simple Operations ................................................................................271
Wi-Fi connections .................................................................................................273
• Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings......................................273
• Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi] ...................................................................274
Send Settings........................................................................................................275
• Image Send Settings ....................................................................................275
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ...............................................................................................276
11. Connecting to other devices
Connecting............................................................................................................277
Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen .................................................................278
• Recording while monitoring camera images ................................................279
• Using VIERA Link (HDMI) ............................................................................280
Importing images to a PC .....................................................................................281
• Copying Images to a PC ..............................................................................281
• Installing Software ........................................................................................283
Storing on a Recorder ...........................................................................................284
9
Contents
12. Materials
Digital Camera Accessory System........................................................................285
Optional accessories.............................................................................................286
Monitor Display/Viewfinder Display.......................................................................290
Message Display...................................................................................................297
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................299
Cautions for Use ...................................................................................................307
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time
with the Battery .....................................................................................................314
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time
with Cards .............................................................................................................317
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode................................319
Specifications ........................................................................................................323
Trademarks and Licenses .....................................................................................331
10
Contents by Function
Recording
Recording Mode ..............................P40
[Preview]..........................................P74
Bulb recording .................................P71
[Live View Composite] ..................... P72
[Time Lapse Shot] .........................P131
[Stop Motion Animation] ................P133
Bracket Recording.........................P137
[Silent Mode] .................................P203
[Multi Exp.].....................................P206
4K photo
4K Photo Recording ...................... P115
Post Focus Recording ...................P126
Focus (AF/MF)
AF....................................................P86
[Focus Mode]...................................P88
[AF Sensitivity(Photo)].................... P89
[AF Mode]........................................P90
Adjusting the AF area position ........P95
MF .................................................P100
[AF/AE Lock] .................................P103
Drive
[Drive Mode] ..................................P111
[Burst] ............................................P112
[Self Timer] ....................................P136
Picture Quality and Color Tone
[White Balance]..............................P108
[Picture Size]..................................P192
[Quality]..........................................P193
[Photo Style] ..................................P194
[Filter Settings]...............................P196
[Color Space] .................................P197
[Highlight Shadow].........................P198
[i.Dynamic] .....................................P199
[i.Resolution]..................................P200
[Long Shtr NR] ...............................P201
[Shading Comp.] ............................P202
[Diffraction Compensation] ............P202
[HDR] .............................................P205
Exposure
[Touch AE] .......................................P50
[One Push AE] .................................P75
[AF/AE Lock]..................................P103
Exposure Compensation ...............P104
[Sensitivity].....................................P106
Exposure Bracket ..........................P138
[Metering Mode].............................P198
Stabilizer
Dual I.S. .........................................P141
5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer.......P142
Flash
[Flash Mode] ..................................P156
[Flash Synchro]..............................P158
[Flash Adjust.] ................................P159
Wireless flash settings...................P160
Recording
11
Contents by Function
Motion Picture
[Rec Quality]..................................P165
Log recording (V-Log L) ................P168
Recording still pictures while
recording motion pictures ..............P169
[Snap Movie] .................................P170
Creative Video Mode .....................P174
[4K Live Cropping] .........................P176
Slow & Quick Mode ....................... P178
Audio
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] ..................P173
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]..............P173
[Wind Cut] ......................................P289
[Wind Noise Canceller] ..................P208
[Lens Noise Cut] ............................P208
Monitoring
HDMI output during recording........P279
[Sound Output]...............................P209
Screen settings
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] ................P173
[Monochrome Live View] ...............P216
[Center Marker]..............................P218
[Zebra Pattern]...............................P219
Basic settings
[Format] ...........................................P30
[Clock Set] .......................................P35
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ..... P38
[Q.MENU] ........................................P54
[Beep] ............................................P228
[Power Save Mode] .......................P229
[Reset] (initialization) ..................... P234
[Sensor Cleaning]..........................P235
Customization
Fn buttons........................................P56
Custom Mode ..................................P76
[Custom] menu ..............................P210
Motion Picture
Setup/Custom
12
Contents by Function
Playback
Picture playback ............................P182
Motion picture playback.................P183
Playback Zoom..............................P185
Thumbnail Screen .........................P185
Delete ............................................P189
[Auto Review] ................................P216
[Slide Show] ..................................P238
[Rotate]/[Rotate Disp.] ...........P251, 252
Edit
[4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]...............P121
Post Focus.....................................P126
Focus Stacking ..............................P129
[Title Edit].......................................P241
[RAW Processing]..........................P242
[Light Composition] ........................P245
[Sequence Composition]................P246
[Clear Retouch]..............................P247
[Text Stamp] ..................................P248
[Resize]..........................................P249
[Cropping] ......................................P250
Image settings
[Protect] .........................................P240
[Rating] ..........................................P240
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Bluetooth connection.....................P256
Wi-Fi connection........................... P259
[Wi-Fi Setup]................................. P276
Smartphone app “LUMIX Sync” .....P255
[Remote shooting]..........................P262
Location information ......................P267
Sending images
(Smartphone).........................P265, 269
PC
“SILKYPIX Developer Studio”.......P283
Transferring images to a PC .........P281
TV
Playing Back Pictures on a
TV Screen .....................................P278
[VIERA Link] ..................................P280
Recorder
Dubbing .........................................P284
Playback
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Connections with other devices
13
1.
Before Use
Care of the camera
∫ Firmware of Your Camera/Lens
Firmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add
functionality. For smoother recording, we recommend updating the firmware of the
camera/lens to the latest version.
• For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware, visit the
following support website:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index.html
(English only)
• To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera.
∫ Handling of the Camera
Do not subject the camera to strong vibration, impacts, or pressure.
These may cause a malfunction or damage.
– Do not drop or knock against hard surfaces.
– Do not push hard on the lens section or monitor.
If sand, dust, or liquid gets on the monitor, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
– If the monitor is closed when such liquids are present, malfunction may result.
– Touch operations may be incorrectly recognized.
Do not place a hand inside the camera mount.
This may cause a failure or damage because the sensor is a precision device.
If you shake the camera while turning the camera off, a sensor may operate or a
rattling sound may be heard. This is caused by the image stabilizer mechanism in
the body. It is not a malfunction.
∫ Splash Resistant
Splash Resistant is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this camera
offers against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust. Splash
Resistant does not guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is subjected
to direct contact with water.
In order to minimize the possibility of damage please be sure the following
precautions are taken:
– Splash Resistant works in conjunction with the lenses that were specifically designed to
support this feature.
– Securely close the doors, socket caps, contact points cover, flash, etc.
– When the lens or cap is removed or a door is open, do not allow sand, dust, and moisture to
enter inside.
– If liquid gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
1. Before Use
14
∫ Condensation (When the Lens, the Viewfinder or Monitor is Fogged Up)
• Condensation occurs when there are temperature or humidity differences. Be careful because
condensation can lead to stains or mold on the lens, viewfinder, and monitor or cause a failure.
• If condensation occurs, turn off the camera and leave it for approx. 2 hours. The fog will
disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the ambient
temperature.
∫ Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance
Perform trial recording in advance of an important event (wedding, etc.) to check that
recording can be performed normally.
∫ No Compensation Regarding Recording
Please note that compensation cannot be provided in the event that recording could not be
performed due to a problem with the camera or a card.
∫ Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights
Under copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for other
than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder.
Be careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the
purpose of personal enjoyment.
∫ Also Read “Cautions for Use” (P307)
15
1. Before Use
Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.
• The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the camera
was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual <Quick Start
Guide>” (supplied).
¢1 This is attached to the camera body at the time of purchase.
• Digital camera body
(This is referred to as camera body in this document.)
• Battery pack
(This is referred to as battery pack or battery in this document.)
• Charge the battery before use.
• Shoulder strap
• Body cap
¢1
• Hot shoe cover
¢1
• Cover for the battery grip connector
¢1
1. Before Use
16
¢2 This is attached to the lens at the time of purchase.
• Interchangeable Lens is indicated as lens in this document.
• SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card in this
document.
• The card is optional.
• Consult the dealer or Panasonic if you lose the supplied accessories. (You can purchase the
accessories separately.)
Items Supplied with DC-G97M (Lens Kit Product)
• Interchangeable lens:
H-FS12060 “LUMIX G VARIO 12–60mm/F3.5–5.6 ASPH./POWER O.I.S.”
• The interchangeable lens is dust and splash resistant.
• Lens hood
• Lens cap
¢2
• Lens rear cap
¢2
Items Supplied with DC-G97H (Lens Kit Product)
• Interchangeable lens:
H-FSA14140 “LUMIX G VARIO 14–140mm/F3.5–5.6 II ASPH./POWER O.I.S.”
• The interchangeable lens is dust and splash resistant.
• Lens hood
• Lens cap
¢2
• Lens rear cap
¢2
17
1. Before Use
Names and Functions of Components
∫ Camera body
8
27 2631
15
9
11
12
24
4
1614
13
10
22
23
25
19
18
17
21
20
3421
756
282930
1
[ ] (White Balance) button (P108)
2
[ ] (ISO sensitivity) button (P106)
3
[ ] (Exposure Compensation) button (P104)
4
Shoulder strap eyelet (P21)
5
Camera ON/OFF switch (P35)
6
[ ] (Focus distance reference mark) (P102)
7
Charging lamp (P25)/
WIRELESS connection lamp (P254)
8
Dial operation switch button (P42)/
Fn button (Fn1) (P56)
9
Rear dial (P41)
10
Shutter button (P39)
11
Front dial (P41)
12
Self-timer indicator (P136)/
AF Assist Lamp (P212)
13
Motion picture button (P163)
14
Mode dial (P40)
15
Flash (P152)
16
Hot shoe (Hot shoe cover) (P153)
• Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of
children to prevent swallowing.
17
Stereo microphone (P173)
• Be careful not to cover the microphone with
your finger. Doing so may make sound difficult
to record.
18
[ ] (Flash open lever) (P152)
• The flash opens, and recording with the flash
becomes possible.
19
Diopter adjustment dial (P38)
20
[MIC] socket (P288)
21
Drive mode dial (P111)
22
Headphone socket (P209)
• Excessive sound pressure from earphones
and headphones can cause hearing loss.
23
[REMOTE] socket (P287)
24
[USB/CHARGE] socket (P24, 281, 284)
25
[HDMI] socket (P278)
26
Lens release button (P32)
27
Lens lock pin
28
Mount
29
Contact points
30
Sensor
31
Lens fitting mark (P31)
1. Before Use
18
• Fn buttons ([Fn4] to [Fn8]) are touch
icons.
Touch the [ ] tab on the recording screen to
display them.
32
41
42
43
46
45
34 35
38
37
36
50 47
40
39
44
33
49 48
32
Touch screen (P48)/monitor (P290)
33
[LVF] button (P38)/[Fn3] button (P56)
34
Viewfinder (P38, 308)
35
Eye sensor (P38)
36
Eye cup
37
[ ] (Playback) button (P182)
38
Speaker (P228)
39
[AF/AE LOCK] button (P103)
40
Focus mode lever (P86, 88, 100)
41
Control dial (P43)
42
Cursor buttons (P44)/
3: Fn button (Fn9) (P56)
4: Fn button (Fn11) (P56)/
Send to smartphone button
2: [ ] (AF Mode) button (P86)
1: Fn button (Fn10) (P56)
43
[MENU/SET] button (P44, 51)
44
Card door (P28)
45
[Q.MENU] button (P54)/[Fn2] button (P56)/
[ ] (Delete) button (P189)/
[ ] (Cancel) button (P53)
46
[DISP.] button (P44)
47
Battery door (P22)
48
Release lever (P22)
49
Cover for the battery grip connector (P286)
• Keep the cover for the battery grip connector
out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
50
Tripod mount (P312)
• It may not be possible to attach and securely
fasten a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm
(0.22 inch) or more to the camera. Doing so
may also damage the camera.
1. Before Use
20
About the Lens
This unit can use the dedicated lenses compatible with
the Micro Four Thirds
TM
System lens mount specification
(Micro Four Thirds mount).
∫ About the lens and functions
Depending on the lens used, certain functions, such as focus, Image stabilizer, and zoom
functions, may be disabled or operate differently.
• Refer to catalogs/websites for information regarding supported lenses.
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(This Site is English only.)
• The focal lengths marked on a Micro Four Thirds lens are equivalent to twice those of a
35 mm film camera. (The focal lengths will be equivalent to those of a 100 mm lens in 35 mm
terms when a 50 mm lens is used.)
21
2.
Getting Started/Basic Operations
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
We recommend attaching the shoulder strap when using the camera to prevent it
from dropping.
1
Pass the shoulder strap through the
shoulder strap eyelet on the camera body.
A: Shoulder strap eyelet
2
Pass the end of the shoulder strap
through the ring in the direction of the
arrow and then pass it through the
stopper.
3
Pass the end of the shoulder strap
through the hole on the other side of the
stopper.
4
Pull the shoulder strap and
then check that it will not
come out.
• Perform steps
1
to
4
and then
attach the other side of the
shoulder strap.
• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.
– Do not wrap the strap around your neck. It may result in injury or accident.
– Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
22
Charging the Battery
You can charge the battery in the camera body.
If you turn on the camera, you can also power it from a power outlet.
• You can also charge with a Battery Charger (DMW-BTC12: optional).
• The battery that can be used with the camera is DMW-BLC12. (As of January 2025)
• Check that this unit is turned off.
1
Open the battery door.
• Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow (to the OPEN side).
• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries
(DMW-BLC12).
• If you use other batteries, we cannot
guarantee the quality of this product.
2
Insert the battery.
• Insert the terminal end of the battery and
push until a locking sound is heard.
• Check that the lever A is holding the battery
in place.
3
Close the battery door.
• Close the battery door, and slide the battery
door release lever to the [LOCK] position.
• The battery is not charged when the camera is shipped. Charge the battery before use.
Battery Insertion
23
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
∫ Removing the Battery
Push the lever A in the direction of the arrow to remove.
• Confirm that there is no foreign matter adhered on the inner side (rubber seal) of the battery
door.
• Remove the battery after use.
(The battery will be exhausted if left for a long period of time after being charged.)
• The battery becomes warm after using it and during and after charging. The camera
also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• Turn the camera off and wait for the “LUMIX” display on the monitor to clear before removing
the battery.
(Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be damaged or
the recorded pictures may be lost.)
• Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
24
1
Turn off the camera.
2
Insert the battery into the camera.
3
Connect the camera [USB/CHARGE] socket and the AC adaptor using the USB
connection cable.
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction.)
4
Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
• The charging light turns red and charging begins.
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging
• It is recommended to use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC11: optional) for
charging.
• You can also charge with a Battery Charger (DMW-BTC12: optional).
• You can charge with the camera body using a commercially available AC adaptor and a USB
connection cable.
¢
Recommended specifications for the commercially available AC adaptor
– Supports 5 V/3 A (15 W) DC output
– USB Type-C terminal
¢
Use a USB connection cable with 15 W output or better for charging.
• You can also use an AC adaptor with 5 V/500 mA or better for charging. However, charging
time may be longer than with the recommended AC adaptor.
• Operation is not guaranteed with all commercially available devices.
• The battery inserted in the Battery Grip (optional) cannot be charged.
(A) Charging lamp
(B) To the AC adaptor
(B)
(A)
2
1
3
25
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
∫ About the charging lamp
• When the charging lamp flashes
– Reconnect the USB connection cable in a location where the ambient temperature (and the
temperature of battery) is in a 10 oC to 30 oC (50 oF to 86 oF) range, and try charging again.
– If the USB device (PC etc.) is not capable of supplying sufficient power, charging is not
possible.
• Using the camera body and the optional AC Adaptor (DMW-AC11).
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been used
for a long time may be longer than normal.
• After charging, disconnect the connection to the power source.
• The camera consumes a small amount of power even after it is turned off by setting the
camera on/off switch to [OFF]. When the camera will not be used for a long time, remove the
power plug from the electrical outlet in order to save power.
• You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and the camera with
the USB connection cable. In that case, charging may take a while.
Lit red: Charging.
Off: Charging has completed.
(When charging is complete, disconnect
the camera from the power outlet or
computer.)
Charging time Approx. 180 min
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
26
When the battery is inserted into the camera for charging and the camera is turned on, you
can record while the camera is being supplied with power.
• It is recommended to use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC11: optional) for
supplying power.
• You can supply power to the camera body using a commercially available AC adaptor and USB
connection cable.
¢
Recommended specifications for the commercially available AC adaptor
– Supports 5 V/3 A (15 W) DC output
– USB Type-C terminal
¢
Use a USB connection cable with 15 W output or better for supplying power.
• Operation is not guaranteed with all commercially available devices.
• [ ] is displayed in the screen while power is being supplied.
About the power supply
• In certain situations where the camera is used, such as during recording, the battery
may drain. The camera will turn off when the battery power runs out.
• The battery cannot be charged while power is being supplied.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor, turn the camera off.
• Power may not be supplied depending on the power supply capacity of the USB device (PC
etc.).
• If the ambient temperature is high, after [ ] is displayed, the supply of power may stop. Wait
until the camera cools down.
27
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
∫ Power Indications
Indication on monitor
(A) USB connection cable supplying power
(B) Battery indication
Battery level indication
• The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate. The exact level varies depending on
the environment and the operating conditions.
Notifications regarding charging/power supply
75 % or higher
50 % to 74 %
25 % to 49 %
24 % or below
Low battery
• Recharge the battery or replace it with a fully charged
battery.
Blinking red
• We recommend that genuine Panasonic batteries are used.
There is a possibility that the use of non-genuine batteries can cause accidents or
malfunctions that may lead to fire or explosion.
Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure resulting from the
use of non-genuine batteries.
• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the resulting heat
generated.
• Do not use USB extension cables or USB conversion adaptors.
• The battery can be recharged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not
recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery is fully
charged. (Since characteristic swelling may occur.)
• If there is a power outage or other problem with the electrical outlet, then charging may not
complete successfully.
Reconnect the power plug.
• Do not connect to keyboards or printer USB ports, or to USB hubs.
• If the connected PC enters sleep status, then charging/power supply may stop.
• If the battery indication does not go to [ ] even when charging is complete, the battery
may be deteriorating.
Try not to use that battery.
(A)
(B)
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
28
Inserting the Card (Optional)
• Check that this unit is turned off.
1
Slide the card door to open it.
2
Insert the card firmly all the way in until a
clicking sound is heard.
• Check the orientation of the card.
A: Do not touch the connection terminals of the card.
3
Close the card door and slide it firmly in the
direction of the arrow until a clicking sound
is heard.
∫ To remov e
Insert until a clicking sound is heard and then pull it
straight out.
• Turn the camera off and wait for the “LUMIX” display on the monitor to clear before removing
the card. (Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be
damaged or the recorded pictures may be lost.)
29
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
∫ Card access indicators
Access indication
The access indication displays red when pictures are being recorded on
the card.
• Do not perform the operations below while the card is being accessed (while image data
is being written or read or deletion or formatting is in progress, for example).
These operations may damage the card or recorded data or cause the camera to stop
functioning correctly.
– Turning off the camera.
– Remove the battery or card or disconnect the power plug.
– Exposing the camera to vibration, impact or static electricity.
• If operation fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation
again.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
30
Card Information
The following cards which conform to the SD standard can be used with this unit.
(These cards are indicated as card in the text.)
∫ Recording of motion pictures/4K photos and speed class ratings
Use a card that meets the following ratings of the SD Speed Class or UHS Speed Class.
• SD Speed Class and UHS Speed Class are the speed standards regarding continuous writing.
To check the class, see the labeled side, etc. of the card.
Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.
Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary
data in advance.
SD memory card/SDHC
memory card/SDXC memory
card (Maximum 512 GB)
• This unit is compatible with UHS-
I
/UHS-
II
UHS Speed Class
3 standard SDHC/SDXC memory cards.
[Rec Quality] Speed class Label example
FHD/HD Class 4 or higher
4K UHS Speed Class 3
4K Photo/Post Focus function UHS Speed Class 3
• If you set the Write-Protect switch A to “LOCK”, you may not be able to write,
delete or format the data or display it by recording date.
• The data on the card may be damaged or lost due to electromagnetic waves,
static electricity or breakdown of the camera or the card. We recommend storing
important data on a PC etc.
• Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Formatting the card (initialization)
> [Setup] > [Format]
• Do not turn off the camera or perform other operations during formatting.
• Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.
• If the card has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again with the camera.
MENU
31
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Attaching a Lens
• Check that the camera is turned off.
• Change lenses where there is not a lot of dirt or dust. Refer to P308 when dirt or dust gets on
the lens.
1
Turn the lens rear cap A and the body cap B in the direction of the
arrow to detach them.
2
Align the lens fitting marks C and then rotate the lens in the direction
of the arrow until it clicks.
• Do not press the lens release button D when you attach a lens.
• Do not try to attach the lens when holding it at an angle to the camera body as the lens
mount may get scratched.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
32
∫ Removing a Lens
• Attach the lens cap.
While pressing on the lens release button A, rotate the
lens toward the arrow until it stops and then remove.
• When the lens is removed from the camera, dust and other particles may accumulate on or
enter the camera or lens.
Be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear cap.
∫ Attaching a Lens Hood
When recording into strong backlight, irregular reflection may occur within the lens. The
lens hood reduces the inclusion of unwanted light in the recorded images and lowers the
drop in contrast. The lens hood cuts off excess lighting and improves the picture quality.
To attach the lens hood (flower shape) that came with the interchangeable lenses
(H-FS12060/H-FSA14140)
Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as shown in
the figure.
• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will be
bent.
1
Align the mark A ( ) on the lens hood with the
mark on the tip of the lens.
2
Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the
arrow until it clicks and then align the mark B
( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip
of the lens.
33
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
∫ Removing the lens hood (H-FS12060)
Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to detach
it.
Temporarily Storing the Lens Hood
Example: H-FS12060
1 Remove the lens hood.
2 Align the mark C
( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.
3 Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
34
Changing the Monitor Position
At the time when this camera is purchased, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.
Bring out the monitor as shown below.
1 Open the monitor. (It opens up to 180o.)
2 It can be rotated 180o forward.
3 Return the monitor to its original position.
• When rotating the monitor, be careful not to apply too much force. Doing so may cause
damage.
∫ Free angle shooting
You can rotate 180o towards the lens and 90o downwards.
Taking pictures at a high angle Taking pictures at a low angle
• The angles of adjustment are only guides.
• Do not apply an excessive force. This may cause damage or malfunction.
• When not using the camera, close the monitor with the monitor surface facing in.
35
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the
First Time)
• The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.
1
Turn the camera on.
• If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed
to step
4
.
2
Press [MENU/SET].
3
Press 3/4 to select the language, and press
[MENU/SET].
4
When [Please set the clock] appears, press [MENU/SET].
5
Press 2/1 to select the items (year, month,
day, hour, minute), and press 3/4 to set.
A
: Time at the home area
B
: Time at the travel destination
To set the display order and the time display
format.
• To display the setting screen of the order/time, select
[Style] and then press [MENU/SET].
6
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
36
7
When [The clock setting has been completed.] is displayed, press
[MENU/SET].
8
When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press [MENU/SET].
9
Press 2/1 to select the home area, and then
press [MENU/SET].
• If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The
time will move forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
∫ Re-adjusting the clock
• The clock can be reset as shown in steps
5
and
6
on P35.
> [Setup] > [Clock Set]
• If the camera is used without setting the clock, it will be set to 0:00, January 1st, 2025.
• The clock setting is maintained for 3 months using the built-in clock battery even without the
battery.
(Leave the charged battery in the unit for 24 hours to charge the built-in battery.)
MENU
37
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Basic Operations
Hold the camera gently with both hands, keep your arms still at your side and stand
with your feet slightly apart.
• Do not cover the flash A, AF Assist lamp B, microphone C, or speaker D with your
fingers or other objects.
• Make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another person or
object in the vicinity while taking pictures.
∫ Detects orientation of camera (Direction Detection Function)
This function detects the vertical orientation when you record
with the camera vertically orientated.
When you play back the recording, the recording is
automatically displayed in vertical orientation.
(Only available when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [ON].)
• When the camera is held vertically and tilted significantly up or down to record, the Direction
Detection Function may not work correctly.
How to Hold the Camera
• You can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information during video
recording. (P222)
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
38
Rotate the diopter adjustment dial until you can see the
characters displayed in the viewfinder clearly.
Press [LVF].
A [LVF] button
B Eye sensor
∫ Notes on automatic viewfinder/monitor switching
Bring your eye or an object near the viewfinder to automatically switch to the viewfinder
display using the eye sensor.
Using the Viewfinder
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
Switching the Monitor/Viewfinder
Automatic viewfinder/
monitor switching
Viewfinder display Monitor display
• To reduce the battery consumption, set [Power Save LVF Shooting] in [Power Save Mode]
(P229).
• Eye sensor might not work properly depending on the shape of your eyeglasses, the way you
hold the camera, or bright light shining around the eyepiece.
• Automatic viewfinder/monitor switching does not work during motion picture playback and
slide shows.
• The eye sensor does not work depending on the angle of the monitor.
• If [Eye Sensor AF] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu is set to [ON], the camera
automatically adjusts the focus as the eye sensor is activated. The camera does not beep
when focus is achieved with [Eye Sensor AF].
39
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
The shutter button works in two steps.
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• Aperture value and shutter speed are displayed.
(It will flash in red if the correct exposure is not achieved, except
when set to flash.)
• Once the subject is in focus, the focus indication is displayed.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication flashes.)
A Shutter speed
B Aperture value
C Focus indication
Press the shutter button fully (push it in further), and
take the picture.
Shutter button (Taking pictures)
• Make sure that the camera does not move at the moment the shutter button is pressed.
• Pictures cannot be taken until focus is achieved when [Focus/Release Priority] is set to
[FOCUS].
• Even during menu operation or image playback, if you press the shutter button halfway, you
can instantly set the camera ready for recording.
F
F
F
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
40
Start recording by pressing the motion picture button.
• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.
Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture
button again.
Rotate the mode dial and select the recording mode.
• Be sure to align the mode dial with the desired mode by
rotating it slowly.
Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures)
Mode dial (Selecting a Recording Mode)
Intelligent Auto Mode (P61)
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (P62)
Program AE Mode (P67)
Aperture-Priority AE Mode (P69)
Shutter-Priority AE Mode (P69)
Manual Exposure Mode (P70)
Creative Video Mode (P174)
Slow & Quick Mode (P178)
Custom Mode (P76)
Scene Guide Mode (P77)
Creative Control Mode (P80)
41
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Rotating: Selects an item or numeric value.
• This document describe operations of the front dial/rear dial as follows:
Allows you to set the aperture, shutter speed, and other settings when in / / /
modes.
∫ Setting the functions to be assigned to the dials in the ISO sensitivity settings
screen
Front Dial/Rear Dial
e.g.: When rotating the front dial to the left
or right
e.g.: When rotating the rear dial to the left
or right
Mode dial Front dial Rear Dial
Program Shift Program Shift
Aperture value Aperture value
Shutter speed Shutter speed
Aperture value Shutter speed
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [ISO Displayed Setting] >
[Front/Rear Dials]
[/][Sensitivity]/[Sensitivity]
[/][ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]/[Sensitivity]
[OFF/ ] [OFF]/[Sensitivity]
[/][Sensitivity]/[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]
[/OFF][Sensitivity]/[OFF]
MENU
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
42
∫ Setting the functions to be assigned to 3/4 and dials in the exposure
compensation screen
Temporarily changing the items assigned to the front/rear dials
([Dial Operation Switch])
1
Set a Fn button to [Dial Operation Switch]. (P56)
• This function is set in the Fn button (Fn1) at the time of purchase.
2
Press the Fn button.
• A guide will be displayed showing the items temporarily
assigned to the front/rear dials.
• If no operations are performed, the guide will disappear in
a few seconds.
3
Rotate the front/rear dials while the guide is
displayed.
4
Press [MENU/SET] and set.
• You can also complete this step by performing either of the operations below:
– Press the shutter button halfway
– Press the Fn button
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]
[Cursor Buttons (Up/Down)]
[] [Exposure Bracket]
[OFF] [OFF]
[Front/Rear Dials]
[/] [Exposure Comp.]/[Exposure Comp.]
[/][Flash Adjust.]/[Exposure Comp.]
[OFF/ ] [OFF]/[Exposure Comp.]
[/ ][Exposure Comp.]/[Flash Adjust.]
[ /OFF] [Exposure Comp.]/[OFF]
• You can set the following settings in [Dial Set.] of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. (P44)
– Operation methods of the front/rear dials
– Operation method of the control dial
– Items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials in [Dial Operation Switch]
MENU
989898
0
ISOISOISOISO
WBWBWBWB
WB
WBWBWB
WBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBc
AWBc
AWBw
AWBw
AWB
AWB
ISOISOISOISO
43
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Rotating: Selects an item or numeric value.
• This is expressed as follows in this document:
– When rotating the control dial to the left or right:
∫ Setting the operation methods of the dial
Control Dial
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)]
Sets the operations to be assigned to the dials in Manual
Exposure Mode.
[F SS]:
Assigns the aperture value to the front dial, and the shutter
speed to the rear dial.
[SS F]:
Assigns the shutter speed to the front dial, and the aperture
value to the rear dial.
[Rotation (F/SS)]
Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the
aperture value and shutter speed.
[]/[]
[Control Dial Assignment]
Sets the function to be assigned to the control dial in the
recording screen.
[] ([Headphone Volume])/
[/] ([Exposure / Aperture])
¢1
/
[] ([Exposure Comp.])/[] ([Sensitivity])/
[] ([Focus Frame Size])
¢2
¢1 This assigns exposure compensation operation. It adjusts
the aperture value in Manual Exposure Mode.
¢2 This assigns the following operations:
– When the AF Mode is [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ]:
Changing the AF area size
– When the AF Mode is [ ] or the Focus Mode is MF:
Changing the assist screen magnification
MENU
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
44
Pressing the cursor button:
Selection of items or setting of values etc., is performed.
• This document expresses the up, down, left, and right of the
cursor button as 3/4/2/1.
Pressing [MENU/SET]:
Confirmation of setting contents, etc., is performed.
• Displays the menu during recording and playback.
Press [DISP.].
• The display information is switched.
[Exposure Comp.]
Assigns exposure compensation operation to the front/rear
dial. (Except in Manual Exposure Mode)
[] (Front Dial)/[ ] (Rear Dial)/[OFF]
[Dial Operation Switch
Setup]
Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials
when you press the Fn button to which [Dial Operation Switch]
is assigned.
[] ([Front Dial Operation])/[ ] ([Rear Dial Operation])
• Items that can be set are as follows.
– [Photo Style]
– [Filter Effect]
– [Aspect Ratio]
–[4K PHOTO]
– [Highlight Shadow]
– [i.Dynamic]
– [i.Resolution]
– [Flash Mode]
– [Flash Adjust.]
– [Sensitivity]
– [White Balance]
– [AF Mode]
• [Highlight Shadow] uses the two dials.
Cursor buttons/[MENU/SET] button
[DISP.] button (switching the information display)
45
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
You can switch the viewfinder/monitor display method.
• [ ] Viewfinder style (viewfinder display shown as example)
• [ ] Monitor style (monitor display shown as example)
¢ It is displayed when [Monitor Info. Disp.] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) is set to [ON].
You can touch the desired item and change its setting directly.
In Recording Mode
> [Custom] > [Monitor / Display] > [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] >
[LVF Disp. Set]/[Monitor Disp. Set]
[] (viewfinder style)
Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the
composition of the images.
[] (monitor style)
Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their
details.
With information
Without
information
With information
(tilt sensor
display)
Without
information (tilt
sensor display)
With information
Without
information
With information
(tilt sensor
display)
Without
information (tilt
sensor display)
Turned off
On-monitor
recording
information
¢
MENU
98
0
AFS
AFS
L
4:3
60
p
98
0
98
0
AFS
AFS
L
4:3
60
p
98
0
989898
AFSAFS
L
4:3
0
60
p
989898
AFSAFS
L
4:3
0
60
p
AWB
0 0
0
Fn
ISO
AUTO
OFF
L
4:3
AFS
AFS
98
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
46
∫ About the tilt sensor display
With the tilt sensor displayed, it is easy to correct the tilt of the camera etc.
• When the camera is tilted very little or not at all, the level gauge will turn green.
• With [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, you can assign [LVF/Monitor Disp.
Style] to a Fn button.
Each time you press the assigned Fn button, the display style of the monitor or viewfinder
([ ]/[ ]), whichever is currently in use, will change.
A Horizontal direction: Correcting tilt to the left
B Vertical direction: Correcting downward tilt
• Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approximately n1°.
• When tilted significantly upwards or downwards to record, the tilt sensor display may not be
displayed correctly, and the Direction Detection Function may not work correctly.
47
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
¢1Press 3/4 to switch between the following display modes:
– Detailed information display
– Histogram display
– Photo style, Highlight shadow display
– White balance display
– Lens information display
¢2 This is displayed if [Highlight] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu is set to [ON].
In Playback Mode
With information
Detailed
information
display
¢1
Without
information
(Highlight
display)
¢2
Without
information
0
AWBAWB
1/98981/98
2
00
L
4:3
60
F
3.5
s
RGB
1/5
AFS
200
L
4:3
100-0001
AWB
ISOISO
0
60
2025.12. 1 10:00
F3.5
STD.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
48
∫ Touch
To touch and release the touch screen.
∫ Drag
A movement without releasing the touch screen.
∫ Pinch (enlarge/reduce)
On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) two fingers to
zoom in and narrow (pinch in) them to zoom out.
Touch screen (Touch operations)
• Touch the screen with the clean and dry finger.
• If you use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, please follow the instructions
that accompany the sheet.
(Some monitor protection sheets may impair visibility or operability.)
Not available in these cases:
• The touch screen may not function normally in the following cases.
– When touched by a gloved hand
– When the touch screen is wet
Fn5Fn5Fn5
Fn4Fn4Fn4
Fn6Fn6Fn6
Fn8Fn8Fn8
Fn7Fn7Fn7
AABBB
2.0X2.0X2.0X2.0X
49
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Applicable modes:
¢ When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu is set to
[AF+AE], the focus and brightness are optimized for the touched position. (P99)
Taking Pictures Using the Touch Function
Touch AF/Touch Shutter
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch an icon.
• The icon switches every time you touch it.
(Touch AF) Focuses on the position you touch.
¢
(Touch shutter)
Focuses on the touched position before recording
takes place.
¢
(OFF) Touch AF and Touch Shutter are disabled.
3
(When settings other than OFF are selected)
Touch the subject.
• When [ ] (Touch AF) is set, refer to P95 for information
about the operation to change the size and position of the
AF area.
• If shooting with the touch shutter fails, the AF area turns red and disappears.
AF
AF
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
50
Applicable modes:
You can easily optimize the brightness for a touched position. When the face of the subject
appears dark, you can brighten the screen according to the brightness of the face.
∫ Canceling the Touch AE function
Touch [ ].
Touch AE
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch [ ].
• The setting screen for the brightness optimization position
is displayed.
• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively
for the Touch AE.
3
Touch the subject you want to optimize the
brightness for.
• Touch [Reset] to bring the brightness optimization position
back to the center.
4
Touch [Set].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
– When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu has been set to
[AF+AE]
AE
AE
ュリヴヱハ
6HW
5HVHW
51
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Setting menu items
You can either operate the buttons or touch the monitor to set menu items.
1
Press [MENU/SET] to display the menu.
2
Press 2.
• The [Setup] menu contains some important settings relating to the camera’s clock and power.
Check the settings of this menu before proceeding to use the camera.
3
Press 3/4 to select a menu selector icon,
such as [ ].
• You can also select the menu toggle icons by
rotating the front dial.
/ [Intelligent Auto] (P64)
These menus let you set the functions available for
their corresponding Recording Modes.
[Creative Video] (P174)
[Slow & Quick] (P178)
[Custom Mode] (P76)
[Scene Guide] (P77)
[Creative Control] (P81)
[Rec] (P191) This menu lets you set picture settings.
[Motion Picture] (P207) This menu lets you set motion picture settings.
[Custom] (P210)
Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen
and button operations, can be set up according to your
preferences.
[Setup] (P226)
This menu lets you perform the clock settings, select
the operating beep tone settings and set other settings
which make it easier for you to operate the camera.
You can also configure the settings of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
related functions.
[My Menu] (P236) This menu lets you register frequently-used menus.
[Playback] (P237)
This menu lets you set the playback and editing
settings for images.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
52
4
Press [MENU/SET].
Touch a menu selector icon, such as [ ].
Touch the menu item.
• You can switch the page by touching the bar (A) on the right side of the screen.
Touch the Setting to set.
Touch operation
5
Press 3/4 of the cursor button to select
the menu item and press [MENU/SET].
• You can also move to the next screen by rotating the
rear dial.
Touch operation
6
Press 3/4 of the cursor button to select
the setting and press [MENU/SET].
• Depending on the menu item, its setting may not
appear or it may be displayed in a different way.
Touch operation
• You can also rotate the control dial to select the menu selector icon, menu item, or setting.
53
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Touch [ ].
∫ Close the menu
Press [ ] or press the shutter button halfway.
Touch operation
• Press [DISP.] to display the menu description.
• Menu items that are not available are displayed in gray.
If you press [MENU/SET] while a gray item is selected,
the reason why it cannot be set is displayed in some
setting situations.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
54
Quick Menu
This menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used during recording
without calling the menu screen.
1
Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu.
2
Rotate the front dial to select the menu item.
• Setting can also be performed by rotating the control
dial.
3
Rotate the rear dial to select the setting.
4
Press [Q.MENU] to exit the Quick Menu once
the setting is complete.
• You can also select menu items and setting items by pressing 3/4/2/1.
• The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display
style the camera is in.
When using the on-monitor recording information
screen (P45)
Select the item by pressing the [Q.MENU] button and
rotating the front dial, and then select the setting by rotating
the rear dial.
AFSAFS
AU
TO
AWB
L
4:3
0
60
p
60
F
3.5
AFSAFS
AU
TO
AWB
L
4:3
0
60
p
60
F
3.5
AWB
0 0
0
Fn
ISO
AUTO
OFF
L
4:3
AFSAFS
98
55
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.
1
Select the menu.
2
Press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
3
Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu.
4
Press 4 to select [ ] and then press [MENU/SET].
5
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the menu item in the top
row and then press [MENU/SET].
• Items that have already been set in the top row are
displayed in light gray.
6
Press 2/1 to select the empty space in the bottom
row and then press [MENU/SET].
A Items that can be set
B Set items
• You can also perform the same operation by dragging the
item from the top row to the bottom row.
• If there is no empty space in the bottom row, you can replace an existing item with a new
select item by selecting the existing item.
• You can follow the steps below to cancel the setting.
1 Press 4 to move to the bottom row.
2 Press 2/1 to select the item to be canceled and then press [MENU/SET].
7
Press [ ].
• It will return to screen of step
4
.
Press [MENU/SET] to switch to the recording screen.
Customizing the Quick Menu settings
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Q.MENU] > [CUSTOM]
MENU
L
4:3
AFS
L
4:3
AFS
1/5
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
56
Fn Buttons
You can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons.
Different functions can be set for both during recording and playback.
1
Select the menu.
2
Press 3/4 to select the Fn button you want
to assign a function to and then press
[MENU/SET].
3
Press 3/4 to select the function you want to
assign and then press [MENU/SET].
• For details on the functions that can be assigned in [Setting in REC mode], refer to P57.
• For details on the functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode], refer to P59.
• To restore the default Fn button settings, select [Restore to Default].
• When not setting a function in the Fn button, select [Off].
∫ Setting function buttons from the on-monitor recording information screen
You can also display the screen in step
2
by touching [Fn] on the on-monitor recording
information screen (P45).
∫ Assigning functions quickly
You can quickly display the screen in step
3
by pressing and holding an Fn button ([Fn1] to
[Fn3], [Fn9] to [Fn11]) for 2 seconds. (This screen, however, may not be displayed
depending on conditions such as the function registered or the screen displayed.)
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Fn Button Set] >
[Setting in REC mode]/[Setting in PLAY mode]
• Some functions may not be available depending on the mode or the displayed screen.
• Some functions cannot be assigned depending on the Fn button.
MENU
57
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
You can use assigned functions by pressing the corresponding Fn buttons.
∫ Using Fn buttons with touch operations
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch [Fn4], [Fn5], [Fn6], [Fn7] or [Fn8].
∫ Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in REC mode]
Using the Fn buttons during recording
–[Wi-Fi] (P274)
– [Q.MENU] (P54)
– [Video Record] (P163)
–[LVF/Monitor Switch] (P38)
– [LVF/Monitor Disp. Style]
(P45)
– [AF/AE LOCK] (P103)
–[AF-ON] (P103)
–[Preview] (P74)
– [One Push AE] (P75)
– [Touch AE] (P50)
– [Level Gauge] (P46)
– [Focus Area Set]
–[Zoom Control] (P148)
– [1 Shot "4K PHOTO"]
– [Operation Lock]
– [Focus Ring Lock] (P215)
– [Dial Operation Switch]
(P42)
– [Photo Style] (P194)
– [Filter Effect] (P80)
– [Aspect Ratio] (P192)
– [Picture Size] (P192)
– [Quality] (P193)
– [AFS/AFF] (P88)
– [Metering Mode] (P198)
– [Burst Rate] (P112)
–[4K PHOTO] (P115)
–[Self Timer] (P136)
– [Live View Composite]
(P72)
– [Bracket] (P137)
– [Highlight Shadow] (P198)
– [i.Dynamic] (P199)
– [i.Resolution] (P200)
– [Min. Shtr Speed] (P201)
– [HDR] (P205)
– [Shutter Type] (P203)
– [Flash Mode] (P156)
– [Flash Adjust.] (P159)
– [Wireless Flash Setup]
(P160)
– [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P147)
– [Digital Zoom] (P149)
– [Stabilizer] (P141)
– [E-Stabilization (Video)]
(P143)
– [I.S. Lock (Video)] (P144)
– [4K Live Cropping] (P176)
– [Snap Movie] (P170)
– [Motion Pic. Rec Quality]
(P165)
– [Picture Mode in Rec.]
(P169)
– [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
(P173)
– [Sound Rec Level Adj.]
(P173)
– [Mic. Directivity Adjust]
(P288)
– [Silent Mode] (P203)
– [Peaking] (P217)
– [Histogram] (P218)
– [Guide Line] (P2
18)
– [Zebra Pattern] (P219)
– [Monochrome Live View]
(P216)
– [Constant Preview] (P217)
– [Live View Boost] (P217)
– [Rec Area] (P221)
– [Step Zoom] (P150)
– [Zoom Speed] (P150)
– [Exposure Comp.] (P104)
– [Sensitivity] (P106)
– [White Balance] (P108)
– [AF Mode/MF] (P90)
– [S&Q Effect] (P180)
– [Rec / Playback Switch]
– [Restore to Default]
Fn5Fn5Fn5
Fn4Fn4Fn4
Fn6Fn6Fn6
Fn8Fn8Fn8
Fn7Fn7Fn7
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
58
• Fn button settings at the time of purchase.
Fn1 [Dial Operation Switch] Fn7 [Histogram]
Fn2 [Q.MENU] Fn8 [I.S. Lock (Video)]
Fn3 [LVF/Monitor Switch] Fn9
No function is set by default.Fn4 [Wi-Fi] Fn10
Fn5 [Preview] Fn11
Fn6 [Level Gauge]
• With [Video Record], you can start/stop recording a motion picture in the same way as with the
motion picture button.
• When set to [Focus Area Set], it is possible to display the position setting screen of either AF
area or MF Assist.
• When [1 Shot "4K PHOTO"] is set, recording is performed in a specified 4K Photo Mode only
once. After the recording has finished, the camera returns to normal state.
• When [Operation Lock] is set, a certain type of operation is disabled. Set the type of operation
to be disabled in [Operation Lock Setting] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. (P215)
• If you assign [Rec / Playback Switch], you can switch between recording and playback
modes.
• If the screen displays A or similar, the displayed operation will
be performed instead of the function assigned to Fn buttons by
[Fn Button Set].
Fn2
59
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
You can use an assigned function by pressing the appropriate Fn button.
• Depending on the function, you can directly use it for the image being played back.
Example: When [Fn1] is set to [Rating¿3]
1
Press 2/1 to select the image.
2
Press the Fn button (Fn1) to set the image as
[Rating¿3].
∫ Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode]
• The following functions can be assigned to the Fn button (Fn1)/[Fn3].
• Fn button settings at the time of purchase.
Using the Fn buttons during playback
–[Wi-Fi] (P274)
–[LVF/Monitor Switch] (P38)
– [Rec / Playback Switch]
– [Send Image (Smartphone)] (P271)
–[4K PHOTO Play]
– [Delete Single] (P189)
– [Protect] (P240)
–[Rating¿1] (P240)
–[Rating¿2] (P240)
–[Rating¿3] (P240)
–[Rating¿4] (P240)
–[Rating¿5] (P240)
– [RAW Processing] (P242)
– [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] (P121)
– [Restore to Default]
Fn1 [Wi-Fi]
Fn3 [LVF/Monitor Switch]
• If you assign [4K PHOTO Play], a screen will be displayed, allowing you to select the pictures
to be extracted from a 4K burst file and saved.
3
3
3
1/981/98
1/98
1/98
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
60
Entering Text
Follow the steps below when the text entry screen is displayed.
1
Press 3/4/2/1 to select text and then
press [MENU/SET] to register.
• To repeatedly enter the same character, rotate the front/
rear dial or the control dial to the right to move the entry
location.
• Operations when the items below are selected
¢ You can also switch between text modes by pressing [DISP.].
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered.
(Maximum of 9 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.])
• A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ].
(Maximum of 6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.])
2
Press 3/4/2/1 to move the cursor to [Set] and then press [MENU/
SET] to end text input.
– [ ]: Switch text between [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower case
characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)
¢
–[]]: Enter a blank
– [Delete]: Delete a character
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the left
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the right
61
3.
Recording Modes
Easy Recording (Intelligent Auto Mode)
Recording Mode:
The [ ] mode (Intelligent Auto mode) can record images using settings automatically
selected by the camera.
In this mode, the camera makes the optimal settings for the subject and scene.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
• At the time of purchase, the mode is set to Intelligent
Auto Plus Mode.
2
Hold the camera with the lens facing toward
the subject.
• When the camera identifies the optimum scene, the icon
of the scene concerned will change.
(Automatic Scene Detection)
3. Recording Modes
62
The camera detects scenes automatically (Scene Detection)
( : When taking pictures, : When recording motion pictures)
∫ Switching between Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode
1
Select the menu.
2
Press 3/4 to select [ ] or [ ] and then press [MENU/SET].
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode allows you to adjust the settings below while also using
Intelligent Auto Mode for other settings.
[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Macro] [i-Night Portrait]
¢1
[i-Night Scenery]
[iHandheld Night
Shot]
¢2
[i-Food] [i-Baby]
¢3
[i-Sunset] [i-Low Light]
¢1 Displayed when a flash is used.
¢2 Only displayed when [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON].
¢3 Displayed when persons under 3 years old registered in the
camera with the Face Recognition function are detected.
• [ ] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard
settings are set.
• When recording is performed with the 4K Photo or Post Focus
function, Scene Detection works in the same way as when motion
picture is recorded.
> [Intelligent Auto] > [Intelligent Auto Mode]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode Intelligent Auto Mode
Setting the brightness ± —
Setting the color tone ± —
Defocus Control ± —
Menus that can be set Many Few
MENU
63
3. Recording Modes
∫ AF, Face/Eye Detection, and Face Recognition
The AF Mode is automatically set to [ ]. If you touch the subject, the AF tracking function
will work.
• The AF tracking function will also work if you press [ ] (2) and then press the shutter button
halfway.
• When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON], and the face similar to the registered
face is detected, [R] is displayed in the top right of [ ], [ ] and [ ].
∫ About the flash
• Open the flash when the flash is to be used. (P152)
When recording with the flash, the camera automatically selects [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ]
according to the type and brightness of the subject.
∫ Scene Detection
• Use a tripod or similar support when the scene detection has been identified as [ ].
When the camera has judged that camera shake is minimal, the shutter speed becomes slower
than normal.
Take care not to move the camera while taking pictures.
• Depending on recording conditions, different scene types may be selected for the same
subject.
• Shutter speed will be slower during [ ] or [ ].
• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, you can set [Flash Mode] to [ ] (forced flash off) in [Flash] of
the [Rec] menu even with the flash open.
The Backlight Compensation
When there is a backlight, the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically
attempt to correct it by increasing the brightness of the picture.
Backlight Compensation works automatically in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or Intelligent
Auto Mode.
3. Recording Modes
64
When [ ] is detected while taking handheld night shots, pictures of the night scenery will
be taken at a high burst speed and composed into a single picture.
When there is, for example, strong contrast between the background and the subject,
multiple still pictures are recorded with differing exposures and combined to create a
single still picture rich in gradation.
[iHDR] works automatically as needed. When it does, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
[Intelligent Auto] menu
Taking handheld shots of night scenes ([iHandheld Night Shot])
> [Intelligent Auto] > [iHandheld Night Shot] > [ON]/[OFF]
• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.
• Do not move the camera during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• Flash is fixed to [ ] (forced flash off).
Combining pictures into a single picture with rich gradation ([iHDR])
> [Intelligent Auto] > [iHDR] > [ON]/[OFF]
• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.
• Do not move the camera during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete.
• A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs.
Not available in these cases:
• [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR] do not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture
recording.
• [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR] are not available in the following cases:
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post
Focus function
– When recording with the Bracket
function
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Rec] menu is set
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when
[Auto Shooting] is set)
• [iHDR] is not available in the following cases:
– When recording using the flash
MENU
MENU
65
3. Recording Modes
Recording Mode:
∫ Setting color
1
Press [ ].
2
Rotate the rear dial to adjust color.
• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
• The color setting will return to the default level (center
point) when this unit is turned off or the camera is switched
to another Recording Mode.
∫ Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus
Control)
1
Press [ ] to display the brightness setting screen.
2
Press the Fn button (Fn1) to display the setting
screen.
3
Set the blurriness by rotating the rear dial.
• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].
• To cancel the setting, press [Fn2] on the blurriness setting
screen.
• AF Mode is set to [ ].
The position of the AF area can be set by touching the
screen. (Its size cannot be changed)
∫ Setting brightness
1
Press [ ].
2
Rotate the rear dial to adjust brightness.
• In the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, [Exposure Comp.
Disp. Setting], you can change the functions to be set on
the exposure compensation screen. (P42)
• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
Taking pictures with customized color, defocus control, and brightness
settings
A
AB
B
B
SS
SS
SS
500 250 125 60 30
F
F
4.0 5.6 8.0
+1+1
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
+5+5+4+4
3. Recording Modes
66
Change the settings by using the touch screen
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item you want to set.
[ ]: Color tone
[ ]: Defocus level
[ ]: Brightness
3 Drag the slide bar to set.
• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].
• Depending on the lens used, you may hear a sound from the lens while operating Defocus
Control. This is due to the aperture operation of the lens and is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the lens used, operational sound of the Defocus Control may be recorded
during the recording of a motion picture when the function is used.
67
3. Recording Modes
Program AE Mode
Recording Mode:
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and the aperture value according to the
brightness of the subject.
You can take pictures with greater freedom by changing various settings in the [Rec]
menu.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Press the shutter button halfway and display
the aperture value and shutter speed value
on the screen.
A Shutter speed
B Aperture value
• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and shutter speed turn red and blink.
∫ Program Shift
You can change the preset aperture value and shutter speed without changing the
exposure. This is called Program Shift.
It enables you to, for example, make the background more defocused by decreasing the
aperture value or capture a moving subject more dynamically by slowing the shutter
speed.
1
Press the shutter button halfway and display the aperture value and shutter
speed value on the screen.
2
While the values are displayed (about 10 seconds),
perform Program Shift by rotating the rear dial or
front dial.
A Program Shift indication
• To cancel Program Shift, perform either of the following
operations:
– Turn off the camera.
– Rotate the front/rear dial until the Program Shift indication disappears.
Not available in these cases:
• Program Shift is not available in the following cases:
– When recording using the flash
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When the ISO sensitivity is set to [ ]
0
98
98
98
F
3.5
F
3.5
60
60
60
60
F
4.0
F
4.0
2
00
0
98
98
98
3. Recording Modes
68
Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/
Shutter Speed
Recording Mode:
• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the recording
screen. To check on the recording screen, please use [Preview]. (P74)
• The brightness of the screen and the recorded pictures may differ. Check the pictures on the
playback screen.
• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink
when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
(Example: In Manual
Exposure Mode)
A Shutter speed
B Aperture value
Aperture
value
Small
It becomes easier to
defocus the
background.
Large
It becomes easier to
maintain focus as far as
the background.
Shutter
speed
Slow
It becomes easier to
express movement.
Fast
It becomes easier to
freeze movement.
00
+3
30
30
F
5.6
69
3. Recording Modes
When you set the aperture value, the camera automatically optimizes the shutter speed
for the brightness of the subject.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value by rotating the rear dial or the
front dial.
A Aperture value
When you set the shutter speed, the camera automatically optimizes the aperture value
for the brightness of the subject.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial or the
front dial.
A Shutter speed
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to other than [A]
to use the aperture value of the lens.
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
• When the flash is activated, the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/200 of a
second. (P156)
F
8.0
F
8.0
F
8.0
250
250
3. Recording Modes
70
Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed, and
rotate the front dial to set the aperture value.
A Shutter speed
B Aperture value
C Manual Exposure Assistance
Optimizing the ISO sensitivity for the shutter speed and aperture value
When the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], it will be adjusted according to the shutter speed
and aperture value.
• Depending on recording conditions, an appropriate exposure may not be set or the ISO
sensitivity may become higher.
Manual Exposure Assistance
When the ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assistance will be
displayed on the recording screen.
• The Manual Exposure Assistance is an approximation. We recommend checking the pictures
on the playback screen.
Manual Exposure Mode
Available Shutter Speed (Sec.)
When the mechanical shutter is used [B] (Bulb), 60 to 1/4000
When the Electronic Front Curtain is used [B] (Bulb), 60 to 1/2000
When the electronic shutter is used 1 to 1/16000
The exposure is adequate.
Set to faster shutter speed or larger aperture value.
Set to slower shutter speed or smaller aperture value.
• When using a lens having an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to [A] to
activate the front/rear dial settings. At positions other than [A], the ring setting takes priority.
• When the flash is activated, the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/200 of a
second. (P156)
00
+3
3030
F
5.6
000
++
30
+
30
000
−
3
−
3
71
3. Recording Modes
Recording Mode:
If you set the shutter speed to [B] (Bulb) during manual mode, the shutter stays open while
the shutter button is pressed and held fully.(Up to approximately 30 minutes)
The shutter closes if you release the shutter button.
Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to take pictures of
fireworks, a night scene etc.
Bulb recording
• We recommend using a tripod or the shutter remote control (DMW-RS2: optional) when
you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B].
• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], noise may become visible. To
avoid picture noise, we recommend setting [Long Shtr NR] in the [Rec] menu to [ON]
before taking pictures.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording using the flash (only when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND])
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
– When using the electronic shutter
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
3. Recording Modes
72
Recording Mode:
The camera records images at set exposure time intervals, and combines parts with
changes in bright light to save the result as one picture.
A combined image is displayed at each exposure time interval, so you can keep recording
while checking results.
With its ability to take pictures with reduced overall brightness, this function is useful for
capturing the light trails of stars and fireworks with bright night scenery in the background.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Start Live View Composite Recording.
3
Select the exposure time per frame (shutter speed) and ISO sensitivity.
• Shutter speed can be set in the range between [1/2 SEC] and [60 SEC].
• Set ISO sensitivity by pressing [ ] and then rotating the front/rear dials or the control
dial.
4
Press the shutter button fully to obtain an image with reduced noise.
• A countdown screen is displayed. Wait until this step completes.
5
Press the shutter button fully to start recording.
• Images are combined every time the exposure time set in step
3
has passed.
A Histogram display
B Exposure time per frame k Number of pictures
combined
C Elapsed time
• The time is updated with each increase in the number
of pictures combined.
6
Press the shutter button fully again to stop recording.
• This will run noise reduction and save the image.
• Live View Composite can record up to 3 hours per recording.
(Recording stops automatically when the recording time exceeds 3 hours.)
Live View Composite Recording
• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
> [Rec] > [Live View Composite]
> [Start]
MENU
LCLCLC
5 sec. x 1200 sec. x 12005 sec. x 1200
1h40m00s1h40m00s1h40m00s
73
3. Recording Modes
∫ [Shutter Delay]
If you want to reduce the jitter that occurs at the start of recording due to pressing the
shutter button, you can set [Shutter Delay] in Step
2
. The shutter will be released when the
set time elapses after you press the shutter button.
Settings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
∫ How to cancel Live View Composite Recording
On the recording screen, press [Fn2].
• [Long Shtr NR] is fixed to [ON].
• When recording with the flash, the flash fires only in the first frame.
• After an image for noise reduction is obtained, some menus are not displayed.
• The image for noise reduction will be discarded if the following operations are performed.
Follow step
4
again.
– Select [Start] with [Live View Composite].
– Changing the shutter speed
– Changing the ISO sensitivity
– Switching to Playback Mode
– Starting motion picture recording
– Changing the Recording Mode
– Changing the drive mode
• When the shutter button is pressed fully to stop recording, the last image will not be included
in the combined image.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording using the flash (only when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND])
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When using [Filter Settings]
– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
– When [Shutter Type] is set to [ESHTR]
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
3. Recording Modes
74
Applicable modes:
• Confirm the effects of aperture: You can check the depth of field (effective focus range)
before taking a picture by closing the diaphragm blades to the aperture value you set.
• Confirm the effects of shutter speed: Movement can be confirmed by displaying the actual
picture that will be taken with that shutter speed.
Touch [Fn5] to switch between different effect preview
screens.
• [Preview] is assigned to [Fn5] by default. (P56)
Depth of field properties
¢1 Recording conditions
¢2 Example: When you want to take a picture with a blurred background etc.
¢3 Example: When you want to take a picture with everything in focus including the background
etc.
Preview Mode
Normal recording screen
Aperture effect preview
screen
Aperture effect: On
Shutter speed effect: Off
Shutter speed effect
preview screen
Aperture effect: On
Shutter speed effect: On
¢1
Aperture value Small Large
Focus length Tele Wide
Distance to the subject Near Distant
Depth of field (effective focus range) Shallow (Narrow)
¢2
Deep (Wide)
¢3
• It is possible to record while in Preview Mode.
• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/16000 of a second.
Not available in these cases:
• Preview Mode is not available when recording with [4K Pre-Burst].
Fn5Fn5Fn5
Fn4Fn4Fn4
Fn6Fn6Fn6
Fn8Fn8Fn8
Fn7Fn7Fn7
6KWU6SHHG(IIHFW2Q
Fn5
([LW3UHYLHZ
Fn5
75
3. Recording Modes
Applicable modes:
When the exposure setting is too bright or too dark, you can use one push AE to achieve a
suitable exposure setting.
1
Set a Fn button to [One Push AE]. (P56)
2
(When exposure is not adequate)
Press Fn button.
• The aperture and shutter speed change to the settings adjusted for the correct exposure.
• In the following cases, suitable exposure cannot be set.
– When the subject is extremely dark and it is not possible to achieve adequate exposure
by changing the aperture value or shutter speed
– When recording using the flash
– In Preview Mode
– When using a lens that includes an aperture ring
One Push AE
How to tell if the exposure is not adequate
• If the aperture values and shutter speed blink red when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
• If the Manual Exposure Assistance (P70) is anything other than when in Manual
Exposure mode.
Blink red
The exposure is changed to give a
suitable exposure.
800080008000
F
3.53.5
F
3.5
00
-
3
-
3
2
00
989898
98
98
98
2
00
0
60
60
F
3.5
3. Recording Modes
76
Custom Mode
Recording Mode:
Up to 3 sets of current camera settings can be registered using [Cust.Set Mem.].
(, , )
Initial setting of the Program AE Mode is registered as the custom settings initially.
Preparation:
Set to recording mode and menu settings of the state you wish to save.
• The following menu items are not registered as custom settings.
– [My Menu], [Setup] menu, [Playback] menu
– [Custom] menu ([Menu Guide], data registered in [Face Recog.], [Profile Setup] settings)
Set the mode dial to [ ].
• The last used custom set will be called up.
∫ Switching the Custom Mode
1
Select the menu.
2
Press 3/4 to select [Set1], [Set2], or [Set3] then press [MENU/SET].
• The settings are switched to those settings you selected for the
custom set.
∫ Changing the registered content
Registered contents do not change when the menu setting is changed temporarily with the
mode dial set to [ ]. To change the registered settings, overwrite the registered content
using [Cust.Set Mem.] on the [Setup] menu.
Registering custom settings
> [Setup] > [Cust.Set Mem.] >
Custom set where you want to register settings
Using Custom Mode
> [Custom Mode]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
MENU
MENU
C1
C1
C1
C1C 1C1
77
3. Recording Modes
Scene Guide Mode
Recording Mode:
If you select a scene to suit the subject and recording conditions with reference to the
example images, the camera will set optimal exposure, color, and focus, allowing you to
record in a manner appropriate to the scene.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Press 2/1 to select the scene.
• The scene can also be selected by dragging an example
image or the slide bar.
3
Press [MENU/SET].
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
• Depending on the scene, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.
• To change the Scene Guide Mode, select [Scene Switch] in the Scene Guide Menu. This will
return you to step
2
above.
• Some items in the [Rec] menu are not available in Scene Guide Mode as the camera
automatically makes optimization adjustments.
• Although White Balance is fixed to [AWB] for certain types of scene, you can fine tune the
White Balance (P110) or use White Balance bracketing (P140) by pressing [ ] button on
the recording screen.
8
3. Recording Modes
78
Displaying the description of each scene and recording tips
Press [DISP.] while the scene selection screen is displayed.
• When it is set to the guide display, detailed explanations and tips for each scene are displayed.
Types of Scene Guide Mode
Normal display Guide display List display
[Clear Portrait] [Silky Skin]
• The smoothing effect is
applied to the part that has a
similar tone to the complexion
of a subject, as well.
• This mode may not be
effective under insufficient
lighting.
[Backlit Softness] [Clear in Backlight]
[Relaxing Tone] [Sweet Child's Face]
Touch the face.
• A still picture is recorded with
the focus and exposure set for
the touched location.
[Distinct Scenery] [Bright Blue Sky]
[Romantic Sunset Glow] [Vivid Sunset Glow]
79
3. Recording Modes
[Glistening Water]
• Star filter used in this mode
may cause glistening effects
on the objects other than
water surface.
[Clear Nightscape]
[Cool Night Sky] [Warm Glowing
Nightscape]
[Artistic Nightscape] [Glittering Illuminations]
[Handheld Night Shot]
• Do not move the unit during
the continuous shooting after
pressing the shutter button.
• The angle of view will be
slightly narrower.
[Clear Night Portrait]
• We recommend using a tripod
and the self-timer.
• When [Clear Night Portrait] is
selected, keep the subject still
for about 1 second after taking
the picture.
[Soft Image of a Flower]
• For close-up recording, we
recommend that you do not
use the flash.
[Appetizing Food]
• For close-up recording, we
recommend that you do not
use the flash.
[Cute Dessert]
• For close-up recording, we
recommend that you do not
use the flash.
[Freeze Animal Motion]
• The initial setting for the AF
assist lamp is [OFF].
[Clear Sports Shot] [Monochrome]
3. Recording Modes
80
Creative Control Mode
Recording Mode:
You can set the effects to add by selecting example images and checking them on the
screen.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Press 3/4 to select the image effects
(filters).
A Preview display
• You can also select the image effects (filters) by touching
the example images.
3
Press [MENU/SET].
Displaying the description of each image effect
Press [DISP.] while the image effect selection screen is displayed.
• When it is set to the guide display, explanations for each picture effect are displayed.
• It is also possible to display the
selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording
screen.
Normal display Guide display List display
• White Balance will be fixed to [AWB], and [Sensitivity] will be fixed to [AUTO].
• Depending on the image effect, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.
1/8
EXPS
EXPS
1/8
1/8
81
3. Recording Modes
∫ [Creative Control] menu
The menus below are available in Creative Control Mode.
> [Creative Control]
[Filter Effect] Displays the image effect (filter) selection screen.
[Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter]
Allows you to set the camera to take a picture with and without an image
effect simultaneously.
Types of image effects
[Expressive] [Retro] [Old Days]
[High Key] [Low Key] [Sepia]
[Monochrome] [Dynamic
Monochrome]
[Rough
Monochrome]
[Silky
Monochrome]
[Impressive Art] [High Dynamic]
[Cross Process] [Toy Effect] [Toy Pop]
[Bleach Bypass] [Miniature Effect] [Soft Focus]
[Fantasy] [Star Filter] [One Point Color]
[Sunshine]
MENU
3. Recording Modes
82
∫ Setting the type of defocus ([Miniature Effect])
1
Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2
Press 3/4 or 2/1 to move the in-focus portion.
• You can also move the in-focus portion by touching the
screen on the recording screen.
• To set the recording orientation (defocus orientation),
touch [ ].
3
Rotate the rear dial to change the size of in-focus
portion.
• The portion can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/
pinching in the screen.
• To reset the in-focus portion setting to the default, press [DISP.].
4
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
∫ Set the color to leave in ([One Point Color])
1
Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2
Select the color you want to leave by moving the
frame with 3/4/2/1.
• You can also select the color you want to leave by touching
the screen.
• To return the frame back to the center, press [DISP.].
3
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• No sound is recorded in motion pictures.
• With camera models DC-G97P/DC-G97PP:
Approximately 1/10 of the time period is recorded.
(If you record for 10 minutes, the resulting motion picture recording will be approximately
1 minute long.)
The displayed available recording time is approximately 10 times.
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
Approximately 1/8 of the time period is recorded.
(If you record for 8 minutes, the resulting motion picture recording will be approximately
1 minute long.)
The displayed available recording time is approximately 8 times.
Depending on the recording frame rate of the motion picture, the recording time of the motion
picture and the available recording time may differ from the values above.
• If you end motion picture recording after a short time, the camera may go on recording for a
certain period.
• Depending on the subject, the set color may not be left in.
83
3. Recording Modes
∫ Setting the position and size of the light source ([Sunshine])
1
Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2
Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to move the center position of the light source.
• The position of the light source can also be moved by touching the screen.
3
Adjust the size of the light source by rotating the rear dial.
• The display can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in.
• To reset the light source setting to the default, press [DISP.].
4
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
1
Press [ ].
2
Rotate the rear dial to set.
• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
Point for when placing the center of the light
source
A more natural appearance can be created by placing
the center of the light source outside the image.
Adjust the effect to fit your preferences
Image effect Items that can be set
[Expressive] Freshness Understated colors Pop colors
[Retro] Color Yellowish tinge Reddish tinge
[Old Days] Contrast Low contrast High contrast
[High Key] Color Pinkish tinge Aquamarinish tinge
[Low Key] Color Reddish tinge Bluish tinge
[Sepia] Contrast Low contrast High contrast
3. Recording Modes
84
Image effect Items that can be set
[Monochrome] Color Yellowish tinge Bluish tinge
[Dynamic
Monochrome]
Contrast Low contrast High contrast
[Rough
Monochrome]
Grittiness Less gritty Grittier
[Silky
Monochrome]
Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus
[Impressive Art] Freshness Black and white Pop colors
[High Dynamic] Freshness Black and white Pop colors
[Cross Process] Color
Greenish tinge/Bluish tinge/Yellowish tinge/
Reddish tinge
[Toy Effect] Color Orangish tinge Bluish tinge
[Toy Pop]
Area with reduced
peripheral brightness
Small Large
[Bleach Bypass] Contrast Low contrast High contrast
[Miniature Effect] Freshness Understated colors Pop colors
[Soft Focus] Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus
[Fantasy] Freshness Understated colors Pop colors
[Star Filter]
Length of the rays of light
Short Long
Number of the rays of light
Smaller Larger
Angle of the rays of light
Rotate to the left Rotate to the right
[One Point Color] Amount of color left
Small amount of
color
Large amount of
color
[Sunshine] Color
Yellowish tinge/Reddish tinge/
Bluish tinge/Whitish tinge
85
3. Recording Modes
1
Press [ ] to display the brightness setting screen.
2
Press the Fn button (Fn1) to display the setting
screen.
3
Rotate the rear dial to set.
• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].
• To cancel the setting, press [Fn2] on the blurriness setting
screen.
1
Press [ ].
2
Rotate the rear dial to set.
• In the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, [Exposure Comp.
Disp. Setting], you can change the functions to be set on
the exposure compensation screen. (P42)
• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
∫ Change the settings by using the touch screen
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item you want to set.
[ ]: Adjusts an image effect
[ ]: Defocus level
[ ]: Brightness
3 Drag the slide bar to set.
• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].
Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus Control)
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following case:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
Setting brightness
SS
SS
SS
F
F
500 250 125 60 30
4.0 5.6 8.0
+1
+1
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
+5+5+4+4
EXPS
EXPS
86
4.
Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and
Color tone Settings
Using AF
AF (Auto Focus) refers to automatic focusing.
Select the focus mode and the AF mode appropriate for the subject and scene.
1
Set the focus mode lever to [AFS/AFF] or
[AFC].
• The Focus Mode will be set. (P88)
2
Press [ ] (2).
3
Press 2/1 to select AF Mode and then press
[MENU/SET].
• The AF Mode will be set. (P90)
4
Press the shutter button halfway.
• AF will be activated.
• The focus indication is displayed as [ ] in a dark environment, and focusing may take
longer than usual.
• If the camera detects stars in the night sky after displaying [ ], Starlight AF will be
activated. When focus is achieved, the focus indication [ ] and AF areas in focus are
displayed. (Starlight AF cannot perform detection on the edges of the screen.)
Focus
When the subject is
focused
When the subject is not
focused
Focus indication A On Blinks
AF area B Green —
Sound Beeps 2 times —
LOW
LOW
STAR
87
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
• If you zoom in/out after focusing on a subject, the focus may lose its accuracy. In that case,
re-adjust the focus.
Subjects and recording conditions which are difficult to focus
• Fast-moving subjects, extremely bright subjects or subjects without contrast.
• When recording subjects through windows or near shiny objects.
• When it is dark or when jitter occurs.
• When the camera is too close to the subject or when taking a picture of both distant and near
subjects.
How to adjust the composition while pressing the shutter button halfway
When recording with [ ], follow the steps below if the subject is not in the center of the
composition of the picture you want to take. (When the focus mode is set to [AFS])
1 Aim the AF area over the subject.
2 Press the shutter button halfway.
• This will lock the focus and exposure.
3 While continuing to press and hold the shutter button halfway, move the camera to
compose the picture you want to take.
4 Press the shutter button to take the picture.
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
88
Applicable modes:
The method for achieving focus when the shutter button is
pressed halfway is set.
Set the focus mode lever.
Setting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFF/AFC)
Item Recommended recording scenes
[AFS/
AFF]
[AFS]
Subject is still
(Scenery,
anniversary
photograph, etc.)
“AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”.
The focus stays locked while the shutter button is
pressed halfway, so you can perform recording while
changing the composition.
[AFF]
Movement cannot
be predicted
(Children, pets,
etc.)
“AFF” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Flexible”.
If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the focus is readjusted automatically
according to the movement of the subject.
You can set the menu to change the setting.
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [AFS/AFF]
Settings: [AFS]/[AFF]
[AFC]
Subject is moving
(Sport, trains, etc.)
“AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Continuous”.
In this mode, while the shutter button is pressed
halfway, focusing is constantly performed to match the
movement of the subject.
When recording using [AFF], [AFC]
• This predicts the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. (Movement prediction)
• It may take time to focus on the subject when you operate the zoom from Wide to Tele or
suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a nearby one.
• Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.
• While the shutter button is pressed and held halfway, shake may be seen on the screen.
MENU
89
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Applicable modes:
Sets the sensitivity to be applied when adjusting the focus according to the movement of
the subject.
Preparation:
The focus mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC]. (P88)
Settings: [i2], [i1], [w0], [j1], [j2]
• Focus Mode settings of [AFF] and [AFC] work in the same manner as [AFS] in the following
situations:
– Creative Video Mode
– When recording with [4K Burst(S/S)]
– In low light situations
• [AFF] is not available when recording 4K photos. [Continuous AF] works during recording.
• The Focus Mode setting cannot be changed when recording is performed with the Post Focus
function.
[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]
> [Rec] > [AF Sensitivity(Photo)]
r
When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the camera re-adjusts the focus
immediately. You can bring different subjects into focus one after another.
s
When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the camera waits for a short period
of time before re-adjusting the focus. This allows you to prevent the focus from being
accidentally re-adjusted when, for example, an object moves across the image.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
MENU
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
90
Selecting the AF Mode
Applicable modes:
This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and
number of the subjects to be selected.
1
Press [ ] (2).
2
Press 2/1 to select the AF mode and then
press [MENU/SET].
([Face/Eye
Detection])
The camera automatically detects the faces and
eyes of subjects. The camera adjusts the focus on
the eye that is closer to the camera and the
exposure using the face (when [Metering Mode] is
set to [ ]). (P91)
([Tracking])
The camera keeps adjusting the focus and
exposure automatically to the specified moving
object. (Dynamic Tracking)
(When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ]) (P91)
([49-Area])
Up to 49 AF areas can be focused.
This is effective when a subject is not in the center
of the screen.
, etc.
([Custom Multi])
From among 49 AF areas, you can freely set the
optimum shape of the AF area for the subject. (P92)
([1-Area])
The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area
on the screen.
([Pinpoint])
You can achieve a more precise focus on a point
that is smaller than [ ].
If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen
that lets you check the focus will be enlarged.
• In Intelligent Auto Mode and Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, you can switch to either [ ] or [ ].
91
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
When the camera detects faces, AF areas are displayed and
the eye to be brought into focus are indicated.
A: Eye used for focusing
∫ Changing the eye to be brought into focus
Touch the eye to be brought into focus.
• Touching [ ] or pressing [MENU/SET] will cancel the setting
of the eye that has been brought into focus.
Aim the AF Tracking area B over the subject and
then press the shutter button halfway.
• The AF area turns green when the subject is detected.
• The AF area turns yellow when you release the shutter button.
• Press [MENU/SET] to clear the lock.
Touch the subject.
• Perform this operation with the Touch Shutter function canceled.
• The AF Tracking area turns yellow while the subject is locked.
• Touch [ ] to clear the lock.
About [ ] ([Face/Eye Detection])
Yellow: The color changes to green when the shutter button
is pressed halfway and focus is achieved.
White: This is displayed when more than one face is
detected. Faces that are at the same distance as the
face inside the yellow AF area will be brought into
focus.
• The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people.
Only the eyes of the face to be brought into focus can be detected.
Locking the subject to be tracked ([ ] ([Tracking]))
Button operation
Touch operation
• The AF Tracking area will blink in red and then disappear if the lock fails.
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
92
1
Press [ ] (
2
).
2
Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ], etc.), and press
3
.
3
Press 2/1 to select a setting and then press
4
.
A The current shape of the AF area
• The AF area setting screen is displayed.
4
Select AF areas.
B The selected AF areas
When selecting [ ]/[ ]/[ ]
1 Change the shape of an AF area.
2 Press [MENU/SET] to set.
Setting the shape of the AF area ([Custom Multi])
([Horizontal
Pattern])
This shape is
convenient for taking
panning shots or
similar shots.
([Vertical
Pattern])
This shape is
convenient for
recording objects,
such as buildings.
([Central
Pattern])
This shape is
convenient when you
want to bring the
center area into focus.
//
([Custom1]/
[Custom2]/
[Custom3])
You can select a customized setting.
Button operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Moves the position
//
Pinching
out/in
Changes the size
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time:
The position is reset to
the center
Second time:
The size is reset to the
default
ヤピヤビヤヒ
ヤヒ
ヤビ
ヤピ
93
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
When selecting [ ]/[ ]/[ ]
1 Change the shape of an AF area.
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the AF area, and then press
[MENU/SET] to set (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed
again.
• To cancel all selections, press [DISP.].
Touch or drag to select AF areas.
• To cancel the selection of a particular AF area, touch the area again.
2 Press the Fn button (Fn1) to set.
∫ Registering the set AF area to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
1 On the screen in step
3
on P92, press
3
.
2 Press 3/4 to select a destination to which the setting will be registered, and press
[MENU/SET].
Button operation
Touch operation
• Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with [ ]/[ ]/[ ] back to the default
setting.
ヤヒ
ヤビ
ヤピ
ヤヒ ヤビ
ヤピ
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
94
• The AF Mode is fixed to [ ] in the following cases.
– When using the Digital Zoom
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
• The AF Mode is fixed to [ ] when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
• It cannot be set the AF Mode in the following cases.
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]
([Face/Eye Detection])
• [ ] is not available in the following cases.
– [Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/
[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Appetizing Food]/[Cute Dessert] (Scene
Guide Mode)
• You cannot change the eye to bring into focus when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
• The camera may not detect faces in certain situations, such as when the subjects are moving
fast. In such situations, the camera performs the operation of [ ].
([Tracking])
• In situations where AF Tracking does not work correctly due to certain recording conditions,
such as when the subject is small or the location is dark, the operation of [ ] is performed.
• [ ] is not available in the following cases.
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When recording with Live View Composite
• In the following cases, [ ] operates as [ ].
– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Soft Image of a Flower]/[Monochrome] (Scene
Guide Mode)
– [Sepia]/[Monochrome]/[Dynamic Monochrome]/[Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/
[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– [Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome D] ([Photo Style])
([Pinpoint])
• In the following case, [ ] operates as [ ].
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 4K photos
• [ ] is not available in the following cases.
– [AFF]/[AFC] (Focus Mode)
Restrictions on AF Mode
95
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Applicable modes:
When [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] in AF Mode is selected, you can change the position and
size of the AF area. With [ ], you can set the lock-on position.
• Set the touch function to [ ] (Touch AF). (P49)
• You can also display the AF area setting screen by touching the recording screen.
• You can use the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu to set the display method for the
AF area according to your preference. (P210)
1
Press [ ] (2).
2
Select [ ], [ ] or [ ] and press 4.
• The AF area setting screen appears.
3
Change the position and size of the AF area.
¢ This operation is not available for [ ].
4
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• If you have selected [ ], an AF area with the same function as [ ] will be set in the set
position.
Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ] is touched.
AF area movement operation
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch AF] >
[AF]
• The spot metering target can also be moved to match the AF area when the [Metering Mode]
is set to [ ].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
When selecting [ ], [ ], [ ]
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Moves the position
Pinching out/in Changes the size (in small steps)
¢
/ s Changes the size
¢
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: The position is reset to the center
Second time: The size is reset to the default
¢
AF
MENU
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
96
When selecting [ ]
You can set the focus position by selecting an AF area group. The AF area, which is
configured with 49 points, is divided into groups consisting of 9 points each (6 points or
4 points for the groups located at the edges of the screen).
1
Press [ ] (2).
2
Select [ ] and press 4.
• The AF area setting screen appears.
3
Press 3/4/2/1 to select an AF area group.
4
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is
pressed or [ ] is touched.
Examples of group
97
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
You can set the focus position precisely by enlarging the screen.
1
Press [ ] (2).
2
Select [ ] and press 4.
3
Press 3/4/2/1 to set the focus position and then
press [MENU/SET].
• The enlarged display appears.
4
Move [+] to the position to be in focus.
• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by
approximately 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the
picture by approximately 3k to 20k.
• You can also take pictures by touching [ ].
5
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
When selecting [ ]
Button
operation
Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Moves [+].
Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
s Enlarges/reduces the screen.
Switches the enlarged display (windowed/full screen).
[DISP.] [Reset] Returns you to the screen in step
3
.
• You cannot set the position to be in focus at the edges of the screen.
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
98
Applicable modes:
You can move the AF area displayed on the viewfinder by
touching the monitor.
• Press the shutter button halfway to determine the focus position.
To return the focus position to the center, press [DISP.] before determining the position. Press it
again to reset the size to the initial setting.
• To cancel the AF area setting when [ ], [ ] or [ ] is selected, press [MENU/SET].
Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Pad
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch Pad AF]
[EXACT]
Moves the AF area of the
Viewfinder by touching a
desired position on the Touch
Pad.
[OFFSET1] -
[OFFSET7]
Moves the AF area of the
viewfinder according to the
distance you drag the touch
pad.
Operation area can be
selected from 7 areas.
Settings:
[OFFSET1] (all areas)
[OFFSET2] (right half)
[OFFSET3] (upper right)
[OFFSET4] (lower right)
[OFFSET5] (left half)
[OFFSET6] (upper left)
[OFFSET7] (lower left)
Example: When set to [OFFSET1]
[OFF] —
• [Touch Pad AF] is not available in the following cases:
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
– When [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]
MENU
99
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Applicable modes:
1
Touch the subject you want to optimize the
brightness for.
• The AF area with the same function as [ ] is displayed
on the touched position. (P95)
• The brightness optimization position is displayed on the
center of the AF area. The position follows the movement
of the AF area.
• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively
for the Touch AE.
2
Touch [Set].
• To cancel the focus and brightness set with [AF+AE], touch [ ] ([ ] when [ ] is
selected).
Adjusting focus and brightness for the touched position
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch AF] >
[AF+AE]
When the background has become too bright, etc.,
the brightness contrast with the background can be
adjusted by compensating the exposure.
• When recording with the Touch Shutter, the focus and brightness are optimized for the
touched position before recording takes place.
• At the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness around the touched
location.
Not available in these cases:
• The [AF+AE] does not function in the following case:
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
MENU
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
AE
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
100
Record Using MF
Applicable modes:
MF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing.
Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance between the lens
and the subject is determined and you do not want to activate AF.
1
Set the focus mode lever to [MF].
2
Press [ ] (2).
3
Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to adjust the focus position, and press [MENU/SET].
• The assist screen is displayed, enlarging the area.
(MF Assist)
• You can also adjust the focus position by dragging the
screen.
• You can also enlarge the area by performing one of the
following operations:
– Rotating the focus ring
– Moving the focus lever
– Pinching out or touching the screen twice
4
Adjust the focus.
The operations used to focus manually differ depending on the lens.
When using an interchangeable lens with a focus ring
Rotate to
A
side:
Focuses on nearby subject
Rotate to
B
side:
Focuses on distant subjects
When using the interchangeable lens having a focus lever
Move to
C
side:
Focuses on nearby subject
Move to
D
side:
Focuses on distant subjects
• The focusing speed varies depending on how far you move the
focus lever.
A
B
C
D
101
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
B MF Assist (enlarged screen)
C Peaking
D MF Guide
• In-focus portions are highlighted with color. (Peaking)
• You can check whether the point of focus is to the near
side or to the far side. (MF Guide)
You can perform the following operations:
¢1 When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you can perform these
operations after pressing
4
to display the screen that lets you set the area to be
enlarged.
¢2 Not available in Intelligent Auto Mode.
• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by
approximately 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge
the picture by approximately 3k to 20k.
When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring
Press 1: Focuses on nearby subject
Press 2: Focuses on distant subjects
A Slide bar
• Pressing and holding 2/1 will increase the
focus speed.
• Focus can also be adjusted by dragging the slide
bar.
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1
¢1
Dragging Moves the enlarged area.
Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
s Enlarges/reduces the screen.
¢2 ¢2
Switches the enlarged display (windowed/full
screen).
[DISP.]
¢1
[Reset]
¢1
First time:
The position of the enlarged area is reset to the
center.
Second time:
The size is reset to the default.
AF
+
AF
+
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
102
5
Press the shutter button halfway.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing [MENU/SET].
• If you have enlarged the picture by rotating the focus ring or moving the focus lever, the
assist screen will close approximately 10 seconds after the operation.
Achieving focus quickly using AF
Touching [ ].
• AF works at the center of the frame.
• AF also works with the following operations.
– Pressing the [AF/AE LOCK] to which [AF-ON] is assigned
(P103)
– Pressing the Fn button to which [AF-ON] is assigned (P56)
– Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position
you want to focus on
• This function is not available when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
• MF Assist and MF Guide may not display depending on the lens used. To display MF Assist,
use the touch screen or buttons to operate the camera directly.
• If [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu is
enabled, you can store the position of the enlarged MF Assist display for each orientation of
the camera.
• The focus distance reference mark A is a mark used to measure
the focus distance.
Use this when taking pictures with MF or taking close-up pictures.
AF
AF
103
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
Applicable modes:
Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same focus and
exposure settings while changing the composition.
This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or there is a
backlight, for example.
1
Point the camera at the subject.
2
Press and hold [AF/AE LOCK] to fix the focus
or exposure.
• In default settings, [AE LOCK] will operate to fix the
exposure. [AEL] will be displayed on the screen.
• If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AF/AE Lock is canceled.
3
While pressing [AF/AE LOCK], move the camera as you compose the
picture and then press shutter button fully.
∫ Setting the functions of [AF/AE LOCK]
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter] > [AF/AE Lock]
[AE LOCK]
The exposure is locked.
• [AEL] is displayed.
[AF LOCK]
The focus is locked.
• [AFL] is displayed.
[AF/AE LOCK]
Both focus and exposure are locked.
• [AFL] and [AEL] are displayed.
[AF-ON] AF is performed.
• AF Lock only is effective when taking pictures in Manual Exposure Mode.
• AE Lock only is effective when taking pictures with MF.
• The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway even when AE is
locked.
• Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
MENU
60
p
FHD
MP4
989898
AFLAFL
L
4:3
0
60
AELAELAELAEL
F
3.5
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
104
Exposure Compensation
Applicable modes:
Use this function when you cannot achieve appropriate exposure due to the difference in
brightness between the subject and the background.
1
Press [ ].
2
Rotate the front/rear dial or the control dial to
compensate the exposure.
A Exposure Compensation
• In the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, [Exposure Comp.
Disp. Setting], you can change the functions to be set on
the exposure compensation screen. (P42)
3
Press [ ] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
Underexposed Properly exposed Overexposed
Compensate the exposure
towards positive.
Compensate the exposure
towards negative.
+1
+1
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
+5+5+4+4
105
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
• In Manual Exposure Mode, you can compensate the exposure only when the ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
• You can set the exposure compensation value in the range between j5 EV and
i
5 EV.
You can set a value between j3 EV and
i
3 EV while recording motion picture or performing
recording with the 4K Photo or Post Focus function.
• When [Auto Exposure Comp.] in [Flash] in the [Rec] menu is set to [ON], the brightness of the
flash will automatically be set to the level appropriate to the selected Exposure Compensation.
• Depending on the brightness, this may not be possible in some cases.
• When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds the j3EV to i3 EV range,
the brightness of the recording screen will no longer change. Values outside this range will be
applied to the recording screen when the shutter button is pressed halfway or AE Lock is
performed with [AF/AE LOCK].
• The set Exposure Compensation value is stored even if the camera is turned off. (When
[Exposure Comp. Reset] is set to [OFF])
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
106
Setting the ISO Sensitivity
Applicable modes:
This allows the sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) to be set.
1
Press [ ].
2
Rotate the front/rear dial or the control dial to
select the ISO sensitivity.
• In the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, [ISO Displayed
Setting], you can change the functions to be set on the
ISO sensitivity screen. (P41)
A ISO sensitivity
¢1 When [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] in [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] in the [Rec] menu is set to
[AUTO].
¢2 When [Extended ISO] in the [Custom] ([Exposure]) menu is set to [ON].
3
Press [ ] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
AUTO
The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness.
• Maximum [ISO3200]
¢1
(Intelligent ISO)
The camera automatically sets the optimum ISO sensitivity
and shutter speed to suit the movement of the subject and
brightness of the scene to minimize the jitter of the subject.
• Maximum [ISO3200]
¢1
• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is
pressed halfway. It is continuously changing to match the
movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed
fully.
L.100
¢2
, from 200 to 25600 The ISO sensitivity is fixed to various settings.
2
00
2
00
4040
ISO
ISO
ISOISOISO
ISOISOISOISOISOISOISO
AUTO
AUTO
107
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
∫ Extended ISO
Applicable modes:
You will be able to set ISO sensitivity down to a minimum of [ISO100].
Characteristics of the ISO sensitivity
200 25600
Recording location
(recommended)
When it is light (outdoors) When it is dark
Shutter speed Slow Fast
Noise Less Increased
Jitter of the subject Increased Less
• For details on the available flash range used when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], refer to
P152.
• Cannot select [ ] in the following cases:
– Shutter-Priority AE Mode
– Manual Exposure Mode
• When [Multi Exp.] is set, the maximum setting is [ISO3200].
• If you set [Photo Style] to [V-Log L], the lower limit of the ISO sensitivity will be fixed to
[ISO400].
• When the following functions are being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is restricted:
– Creative Video Mode/4K Photo recording/Post-Focus recording:
[AUTO], [200] to [6400] ([L.100] to [6400] if [Extended ISO] is set to [ON])
– Live View Composite recording:
[200] to [1600] ([L.100] to [1600] if [Extended ISO] is set to [ON])
> [Custom] > [Exposure] > [Extended ISO] > [ON]
Not available in these cases:
• [Extended ISO] does not work in the following case:
– When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
MENU
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
108
Setting the White Balance (WB)
Applicable modes:
White Balance adjusts the color of white according to the light source to make the overall
color hue closer to what is seen by the eye.
1
Press [ ].
2
Rotate the front/rear dial or the control dial to
select the White Balance.
¢ [AWB] is applied when you record motion picture or perform recording with the 4K
Photo or Post Focus function.
[AWB] Auto
[AWBc] Auto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)
[AWBw] Auto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)
[] When taking pictures outdoors under a clear sky
[] When taking pictures outdoors under a cloudy sky
[] When taking pictures outdoors in the shade
[] When taking pictures under incandescent lights
[]
¢
When taking pictures with the flash only
WB
WBWBWB
WBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBc
AWBc
AWBw
AWBw
AWB
AWB
109
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
3
Press [ ] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
[]/[]/
[]/[]
A white object is recorded to set the White
Balance. This is convenient for recording under
multiple light sources.
1 Press
3
.
2 Place a white object such as a piece of paper
within the frame at the center of the screen, and press [MENU/
SET].
• This will set the White Balance and return you to the recording screen.
• White Balance may not be set when the subject is too bright or too dark.
Set the White Balance again after adjusting to appropriate brightness.
[]/[]/
[]/[]
Set the White Balance Color Temperature to suit
the light source.
1 Press 3.
2 Press 3/4 to select the color temperature and
then press [MENU/SET].
• You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
Under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixture etc., the appropriate White Balance
will vary depending on the lighting type.
Use [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ].
• If you take pictures with the flash outside the available flash range, the correct White Balance
may not be obtained.
• During Scene Guide Mode:
– Settings are adjusted to suit each scene.
– Changing the scene or Recording Mode will return White Balance settings (including the
White Balance fine-adjustment setting) to [AWB].
1
2
3
4
1 2
3
4
5500K5500K5500K
1
2 3
4
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
110
∫ Auto White Balance
Depending on the conditions prevailing when pictures are taken, the pictures may take on
a reddish or bluish tinge.
Please note that the White Balance may not work correctly in the cases below. In these
cases, adjust the White Balance to anything other than [AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw].
– When there are multiple light sources
– When there are no colors close to white
1 [AWB] will work within this range.
2 Blue sky
3 Cloudy sky (Rain)
4 Shade
5 Sunlight
6 White fluorescent light
7 Incandescent light bulb
8 Sunrise and sunset
9 Candlelight
KlKelvin Color Temperature
You can adjust the coloring even when the coloring you want to apply is not produced by
the selected white balance.
1
Select the White Balance and then press 4.
2
Press 3/4/2/1 to adjust the coloring.
• You can also make fine adjustments by touching the White
Balance graph.
• To reset the position to the center, press [DISP.].
• You can set the White Balance Bracket by rotating the control dial. (P140)
3
Press [MENU/SET].
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to the recording screen.
Finely adjusting the White Balance
2 : [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)
1 : [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)
3 : [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)
4 : [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)
• If you adjust the White Balance to [A] (amber), the White Balance icon on the screen will
change to orange.
If you adjust the White Balance to [B] (blue), the White Balance icon on the screen will change
to blue.
• If you adjust the White Balance to [G] (green) or [M] (magenta), [_] or [`] appears beside the
White Balance icon on the screen.
GGGGGG
AAAAAABBBBBBB
MMMMMM
111
5.
4K Photo and Drive Settings
Select a Drive Mode
Applicable modes:
You can change what the camera will do when you press the shutter button.
Rotating the drive mode dial.
Single
When the shutter button is pressed, only one picture is
recorded.
Burst (P112)
Recordings are made in succession while the shutter
button is pressed.
4K PHOTO (P115)
When the shutter button is pressed, a 4K photo is
recorded.
Post Focus (P126)
When the shutter button is pressed, Post Focus
recording is performed.
Time Lapse Shot/Stop
Motion Animation
(P131, 133)
Pictures are recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop
Motion Animation.
Self Timer (P136)
When the shutter button is pressed, recording takes
place after the set time has elapsed.
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
112
Taking Pictures using Burst Mode
Applicable modes:
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the Burst Mode setting.
Settings: [H] (High speed), [M] (Middle speed), [L]
(Low speed)
3
Focus on the subject and take a picture.
• Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the Burst Mode.
∫ Burst Rate
∫ Number of burst picture frames
• When recording is performed under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.
The burst speed will become slower halfway. However, pictures can be taken until the capacity
of the card becomes full.
Depending on recording conditions, the number of burst pictures that can be taken will be
reduced.
> [Rec] > [Burst Rate]
Burst Rate Live View during Burst Mode
[H] (High speed)
9 frames/second ([AFS]/[MF])
6 frames/second ([AFF]/[AFC])
None ([AFS]/[MF])
Available ([AFF]/[AFC])
[M] (Middle speed) 6 frames/second Available
[L] (Low speed) 2 frames/second Available
With RAW files Without RAW files
[H] (High speed)
27 frames or more 600 frames or more
[M] (Middle speed)
[L] (Low speed)
MENU
AFSAFS
L
4:3
H
113
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
∫ About the maximum number of pictures that can be taken continuously
When you press the shutter button halfway, the maximum number
of pictures you can take continuously will appear.
You can check the approximate number of burst pictures that can
be taken at a constant recording speed.
Example: When 20 pictures can be taken: [r20]
• Once recording starts, the maximum number of pictures that can be taken continuously will
decrease.
The recording speed slows down when [r0] appears.
• When [r99+] is displayed, you can take 100 or more pictures continuously.
∫ Notes on focus in Burst Mode
The way focus is achieved varies according to the focus mode setting and the [Focus/
Release Priority] setting in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu.
¢1 When the subject is dark, the focus is fixed on the first picture.
¢2 Burst speed takes priority, and focus is estimated within possible range.
¢3 The burst speed may become slower.
Focus mode [Focus/Release Priority] [H] [M]/[L]
[AFS]
[FOCUS]
At the first picture
[BALANCE]
[RELEASE]
[AFF]/[AFC]
¢1
[FOCUS] Predicted focusing
¢2
Normal focusing
¢3
[BALANCE]
Predicted focusing
¢2
[RELEASE]
[MF] — Focus set with MF
2020r20
0
2
00
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
114
• The burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings.
– [Picture Size]/[Quality]/[Sensitivity]/Focus Mode/[Focus/Release Priority]
• When the burst rate is set to [H] (when the focus setting is [AFS] or [MF]), the exposure will be
set to that of the first picture. In other cases, the exposure will be adjusted for each picture.
• It may take time to save pictures taken in Burst Mode on the card. If you take pictures
continuously while saving, the maximum number of recordable pictures decreases.
For continuous shooting, use of a high speed memory card is recommended.
• We recommend using the shutter remote control (DMW-RS2: optional) when you want to
keep the shutter button pressed fully while taking pictures in Burst Mode.
Not available in these cases:
• Burst recording does not work in the following cases:
– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Soft Image of a Flower]
(Scene Guide Mode)
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording using the flash
– When using [Multi Exp.]
115
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
4K Photo Recording
Applicable modes:
The camera allows you to take burst pictures of 8 million pixels (approx.) at 30 frames/
second. After taking these pictures, you can save the desired moment extracted from their
burst file.
• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 card.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the recording method.
¢ Audio is not played back when you perform playback with the camera.
3
Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
4
Record a 4K photo.
• If you are using AF, [Continuous AF] will work during recording. Focus will be adjusted
continuously.
> [Rec] > [4K PHOTO] > [Rec Method]
[4K Burst]
For capturing the best shot of a fast-moving subject
(e.g., sports, aeroplanes, trains)
Audio recording: Not available
[4K Burst(S/S)]
“S/S” is an
abbreviation of
Start/Stop.
For capturing unpredictable photo opportunities
(e.g., plants, animals, children)
Audio recording: Available
¢
[4K Pre-Burst]
For recording as needed whenever a photo opportunity
arises
(e.g., the moment when a ball is thrown)
Audio recording: Not available
MENU
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
116
• Burst recordings of 4K photos are made and saved as a 4K burst file in the MP4 format.
• When [Auto Review] is enabled, the picture selection screen will be displayed automatically.
To continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to display the recording screen.
• For information on how to select and save pictures from recorded 4K burst files, refer to P121.
[4K Burst]
1
Press the shutter button halfway.
2
Press and hold the shutter button
fully for as long as you want to
perform recording.
A Press and hold
B Recording is performed
• Press the button fully slightly in advance. Recording starts
approximately 0.5 seconds after it has been pressed fully.
• If you remove your finger from the shutter button immediately after
the start of recording, up to a period of approximately 1.5 seconds
after the moment that the finger has been removed may be
recorded.
[4K Burst(S/S)]
1
Press the shutter button fully to
start recording.
2
Press the shutter button fully again
to stop recording.
C Start (First)
D Stop (Second)
E Recording is performed
Setting markers manually
You can add markers if you press [Fn2] during recording.
(Up to 40 markers per recording) When selecting and saving pictures
from a 4K burst file, you can skip to the positions where you added
markers.
[4K Pre-Burst]
Press the shutter button fully.
F Approximately 1 second
G Recording is performed
• AF adjusts focus continuously, and except
in Manual Exposure Mode, it also adjusts
exposure continuously.
• Images may not be displayed as smoothly as when recording with the
normal recording screen.
Recording tips
In situations where you want to lock focus and exposure, such as
when the subject is not at the center, use [AF/AE LOCK]. (P103)
117
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
∫ Setting Pre-Burst Recording ([4K Burst]/[4K Burst(S/S)])
The camera starts recording approximately 1 second before the shutter button is pressed
fully, so you will not miss a photo opportunity.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
∫ Setting Loop Recording ([4K Burst(S/S)])
You can perform recording while deleting the oldest recorded data, allowing you to keep
on recording while waiting for a photo opportunity without replacing the card.
• Once you start recording, the 4K burst file will be recorded and divided approximately every
2minutes.
Approximately the last 10 minutes (up to approximately 12 minutes) will be saved.
The preceding part will be deleted.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
> [Rec] > [4K PHOTO] > [Pre-Burst Recording]
• When this function is enabled, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• When [Pre-Burst Recording] is being used, AF operations and unavailable menus are the
same as those during [4K Pre-Burst] operation.
> [Rec] > [4K PHOTO] > [Loop Recording(4K PHOTO)]
• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery.
• Up to 12 hours of continuous recording is possible.
• When this function is enabled, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
Not available in these cases:
• [Loop Recording(4K PHOTO)] is not possible when there is insufficient free space on the card.
Battery drainage and camera temperature
• When the ambient temperature is high, the camera may display [ ] and then stop
recording. Wait until the camera cools down.
• When [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst])
¢
or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster
and the camera temperature rises. Use these functions only when recording with
them.
¢ The setting may switch to [ ] ([4K Burst]) to protect the camera.
MENU
MENU
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
118
∫ To change the aspect ratio
Selecting [Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu allows you to change the aspect ratio for 4K
photos.
∫ To record the subject with reduced blur
You can reduce the blur of the subject by setting a faster shutter speed.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial or the front dial.
∫ Preventing camera shake when you are recording pictures
• To reduce camera shake, we recommend that you use a tripod and shutter remote control
(DMW-RS2: optional) when using [Light Composition] or [Sequence Composition].
∫ Shutter sound for recording
• When using [4K Burst] or [4K Pre-Burst], you can change the electronic shutter sound settings
in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone].
• When recording with [4K Burst(S/S)], you can set the start/stop tone volume in [Beep Volume].
• High-speed burst recording can be used quietly when used in combination with [Silent Mode].
∫ Scenes not suitable
Recording in extremely bright locations or indoors
When subjects are recorded in an extremely bright place or under fluorescent/LED
lighting, the color tone or brightness of the image may change, or horizontal stripes may
appear on the screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
Subjects that are moving fast in the horizontal direction
If you record a subject moving fast in the horizontal direction, the subject in the recorded
pictures may appear distorted.
Notes on the 4K Photo function
• Approximate shutter speed for outdoor recording in fine weather conditions:
1/1000 seconds or faster.
• If you increase the shutter speed, the ISO sensitivity becomes higher, which may
increase the noise on the screen.
119
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
∫ The camera’s setup for the 4K Photo function
The camera’s setup is automatically optimized for 4K photo recording.
• The following [Rec] menu items are fixed to the settings below:
• 4K burst files are recorded with the settings indicated below:
Settings in the [Motion Picture] menu are not applied to 4K burst files.
• When recording with the 4K Photo function, the ranges for the following functions differ from
the ones available for taking pictures:
– Shutter speed: 1/30 to 1/16000
– [Min. Shtr Speed]: [1/1000] to [1/30]
– Exposure Compensation: j3EV to
i
3EV
– ISO sensitivity: [AUTO], [200] to [6400] ([L.100] to [6400] when [Extended ISO] is set to [ON])
• The following menu items are disabled:
[Picture Size]
[4K] (8M)
[Quality] []
[4:3]: 3328k2496
[3:2]: 3504k2336
[16:9]: 3840k2160
[1:1]: 2880k2880
[Shutter Type] [ESHTR]
[Rec Quality] [4K/100M/30p] [Luminance Level] [0s255]
[Continuous AF] [ON]
• When recording with the 4K Photo function, the following functions are disabled:
–Flash
– Bracket Recording
– Program Shift
– Focus mode (AFF)
– AF Mode ( )
– [MF Assist] ([4K Pre-Burst] only)
– White Balance ( )
[Intelligent Auto] [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR]
[Creative Control] [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
[Rec]
[Picture Size]/[Quality]/[AFS/AFF]/[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]/
[Color Space]/[Flash]/[Long Shtr NR]/[Shading Comp.]/[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Rec])/[Live View Composite]/[Shutter Type]/[Shutter Delay]/[Bracket]/
[HDR]
[Custom] [Rec Area]/[Face Recog.]/[Profile Setup]
[Setup] [Power Save Mode] (when [4K Pre-Burst] is set)
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
120
• 4K burst file will be recorded and played back in separate files in the following cases. (You can
continue recording without interruption.)
– When using an SDHC memory card:
If the file size exceeds 4 GB
– When using an SDXC memory card:
If the continuous recording time exceeds 3 hours and 4 minutes or if the file size exceeds
96 GB
• The following changes occur when recording 4K photos:
– The angle of view becomes narrower.
– [Location] in [Travel Date] cannot be recorded.
– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] in [Filter Settings] is not available.
– It is not possible to use the HDMI output.
• When recording with [4K Pre-Burst], [Step Zoom] in [Power Zoom Lens] is disabled.
• Scene Detection in Intelligent Auto Mode works the same way as when recording motion
pictures.
• When the drive mode is set to 4K Photo, it is not possible to take pictures while recording
motion picture. (Only when [ ] (Photo Priority) is set)
Not available in these cases:
• 4K Photo does not work in the following cases:
– [Clear in Backlight]/[Glistening Water]/[Artistic Nightscape]/[Glittering Illuminations]/
[Handheld Night Shot]/[Clear Night Portrait]/[Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When using [Multi Exp.]
121
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
Selecting pictures from 4K burst file
1
Select an image with the [ ] icon on the playback
screen, and press 3.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching the icon [ ].
• If the image was recorded with [4K Pre-Burst], proceed to step
3
.
3
Drag the frames to select the frame you want
to save as a picture.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing
2/1.
• To continuously rewind/forward frame-by-frame, touch
and hold [ ]/[ ].
4
Touch [ ] to save the picture.
• The picture will be saved in JPEG format.
∫ [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
You can save any 5-second period of pictures from a 4K burst file all at once.
1
Select the menu.
2
Press 2/1 to select the 4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET].
• If the burst time is 5 seconds or less, all frames will be saved as pictures.
3
Select the first frame of the pictures to be saved at once.
• Select the frame in the same way as you select pictures from a 4K burst file.
• Pictures will be saved as a group of Burst Mode pictures in JPEG format. (P187)
2
Drag the slide bar to make a rough selection
of scenes.
• For information on how to use the slide view screen, refer
to P122.
• You can select its scenes on the 4K burst playback
screen by touching [ ] (Fn1). (P123)
• Touching [ ] allows you to switch to the marker
operation screen. (P124)
Slide view screen
• The picture will be saved with recording information (Exif information), including its shutter
speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity information.
• 4K burst files saved on a PC will be treated as MP4 motion pictures.
> [Playback] > [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
Fn1
AUTO
MODE
MENU
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
122
∫ Navigating the slide view screen
Operations during selecting pictures
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
2/1/
Dragging/
/
Selects a frame.
• To change the frames displayed in slide view, select the
frame at the left/right end, and touch [ ] or [ ].
2/1
Press and hold
/
Touch and hold
Continuously rewinds/forwards frame-by-frame.
s
Touching/
Dragging
Selects the frame to be displayed.
• The previous or next frame is displayed in slide view.
Pinching out/in
Enlarges/reduces the display.
s
Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged display.
(during enlarged display)
3/4/2/1 Dragging Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display).
s Switches a marker to be displayed. (P125)
Fn1 Displays the 4K burst playback screen.
s Switches to marker operation. (P124)
s / Adds/deletes a marker.
s
In-focus portions are highlighted with color. ([Peaking])
• Switches in order of [ ] > [] ([LOW]) >
[] ([HIGH]).
[MENU/SET] Saves the picture
Fn1
AUTO
MODE
Position of the displayed
frame
123
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
∫ Navigating the 4K burst playback screen
During pause During continuous playback
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3 / Continuous playback/Pause (during continuous playback).
4 / Continuous rewind/Pause (during continuous rewind).
1/ / Fast forward/Frame-by-frame forward (during pause).
2/ / Fast rewind/Frame-by-frame rewind (during pause).
s
Touching/
Dragging
Selects the frames to be displayed (during pause).
Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the display (during pause).
s
Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged display
(during enlarged display).
3/4/2/1 Dragging Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display).
s Switches a marker to be displayed. (P125)
Fn1 Displays the slide view screen (during pause).
s Switches to marker operation. (P124)
s / Adds/deletes a marker.
s
In-focus portions are highlighted with color. ([Peaking])
• Switches in order of [ ] > [] ([LOW]) >
[] ([HIGH]).
[MENU/SET] Saves the picture (during pause).
• Each time you touch the screen twice, the display switches between enlarged and normal
view.
Fn1
AUTO
MODE
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
124
• With camera models DC-G97P/DC-G97PP:
• Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to either [AUTO] or a setting with a resolution of [4K/30p].
When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [AUTO].
• If you display 4K burst files on a TV connected to the camera, they will be displayed on the 4K
burst playback screen.
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
• Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to either [AUTO] or a setting with a resolution of [4K/25p].
When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [AUTO].
• If you display 4K burst files on a TV connected to the camera, they will be displayed on the 4K
burst playback screen.
• Depending on the TV to be connected, 4K burst files may not be played back correctly.
∫ Skips to the marked positions
When [ ] is touched on the slide view screen or 4K burst playback screen, the marker
operation screen appears and you can skip to the marked positions. Touch [ ] to
return to the original operation.
Selecting and saving pictures on the TV screen
Marker
When selecting and saving pictures from a 4K burst file,
you can select pictures easily by skipping between
marked positions.
Two types of markers are available.
White marker:
This is manually set during recording or playback.
Green marker:
This is automatically set by the camera during recording.
(Auto Marking function)
Marker operation screen
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
2/1 / Moves to the previous/next marker.
Fn1
AUTO
MODE
125
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
Auto Marking function
The camera automatically sets markers on scenes in which a face or the movement of a
subject is detected.
(Example: At the scene when a vehicle passes by, a balloon bursts, or a person turns
around)
• Up to 10 markers are displayed for each file.
• In the following cases, markers may not be set by the Auto Marking function depending on the
recording conditions and the status of subjects.
– The camera is moving because of panning or jitter
– The movement of a subject is slow/small
– The subject is small
– A face is not facing front
∫ Switches a marker to be displayed
Touch [ ] on the slide view screen, 4K burst playback screen, or marker
operation screen.
[Auto]
Displays a marker on a scene in which a face or the movement of a
subject is detected.
[Face Priority]
Displays a marker with preference given to a scene in which a face is
detected.
[Motion Priority]
Displays a marker with preference given to a scene in which the
movement of a subject is detected.
[Off] Displays manually set markers only.
• You cannot delete markers set by the Auto Marking function.
• The markers set by the Auto Marking function may not be displayed correctly if you split the
4K burst file on another device and then play it back on the camera.
• In the following case, markers set by the Auto Marking function are not displayed.
– 4K burst files recorded with [4K Pre-Burst]
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
126
Post Focus Recording
Applicable modes:
The camera allows you to take 4K burst pictures while shifting the focus to different areas.
After taking these pictures, you can select the desired focus area.
This function is suited for recording still objects.
• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 card.
• We recommend that you use a tripod when recording images to be used for Focus Stacking.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Decide on the composition, and press the
shutter button halfway.
• AF will detect focus areas on the screen. (Excluding the
edges of the screen)
• While the shutter button is pressed and held halfway, shake may be seen on the screen.
• If no areas on the screen can be brought into focus, the focus display (
A
) will flash.
Recording is not possible in this case.
4K burst recording while
automatically shifting the
focus.
Touch the desired focus
point.
A picture with the desired
focus point is made.
From the time you press the shutter button halfway until the end of recording:
• Maintain the same distance to the subject and the same composition.
4K
4:3
127
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
3
Press the shutter button fully to start
recording.
• The focus point changes automatically while recording.
When the icon (
B
) disappears, recording automatically
ends.
• Audio will not be recorded.
• When [Auto Review] is enabled, a screen that lets you select the desired focus area will
be displayed. (P128)
∫ Limitations on the Post Focus function
• Since recording is performed in the same image quality as 4K photos, certain limitations apply
to recording functions and menu settings. For details, refer to “The camera’s setup for the 4K
Photo function” on P119.
• In addition to the limitations of the 4K Photo function, the following limitations apply to the Post
Focus function:
– AF Mode is disabled.
– MF operation is disabled.
– Motion pictures cannot be recorded.
– [Digital Zoom] is disabled.
– The following [Custom] menu items are disabled:
[Shutter AF]
About camera temperature
• When the ambient temperature is high, the camera may display [ ] and then stop
recording.
Wait until the camera cools down.
Not available in these cases:
• Post Focus recording does not work in the following cases:
– [Clear in Backlight]/[Glistening Water]/[Artistic Nightscape]/[Glittering Illuminations]/
[Handheld Night Shot]/[Clear Night Portrait]/[Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When [Multi Exp.] is set
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
128
1
Select an image with the [ ] icon on the playback screen, and
press 3.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching the icon [ ].
2
Touch the desired focus area.
• If a picture that is in focus is not available for the selected
area, a red frame will be displayed. You cannot save a
picture in this case.
• You cannot select the edges of the screen.
• You can fine-adjust the focus by dragging the slide bar
during enlarged display. (You can also perform the same
operation by pressing 2/1.)
3
Touch [ ] to save the picture.
• The picture will be saved in JPEG format.
Selecting the Focus Position for the Picture to Save
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1/
/
Touching
Selects a focus area.
• It cannot be selected during enlarged display.
Enlarges the display.
Reduces the display (during enlarged display).
Fn1
Switches to the Focus Stacking function.
(P129)
s
In-focus portions are highlighted with color.
([Peaking])
• Switches in order of [ ] > []
([LOW]) > [ ] ([HIGH]).
[MENU/SET] Saves the picture.
• You cannot display an image on a TV screen and then select the focus position.
Fn1
129
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
Save a picture with multiple focus positions merged.
A Focus: closer
B Focus: farther away
1
Touch [ ] on the screen that lets you select the desired focus area in step
2
of
“Selecting the Focus Position for the Picture to Save” (P128).
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button (Fn1).
2
Touch the merging method.
(When [Range Merging] is selected)
3
Touch the desired focus area.
• To cancel the selection, touch the focus area again.
• To select multiple areas, drag the screen.
Focus Stacking
[Auto Merging]
Automatically selects pictures that are suited to be merged, and
merges them into a single picture.
• Priority will be given to pictures with closer focus.
• Perform the focus stacking and save the picture.
[Range Merging] Merges pictures with specified focus areas into a single picture.
• Specify at least two areas.
• In-focus areas between the selected two points are
indicated.
• Parts that cannot be selected are indicated in gray.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3/4/2/1/
//
Touching Selects an area.
Fn1 [Set/Cancel] Specifies/cancels an area.
[DISP.]
[All]
Selects all areas.
(Before selecting areas)
[Reset]
Cancels all selections.
(After selecting areas)
[MENU/SET]
Merges pictures and saves
the resulting picture.
Fn1
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW&DQFHO
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
Fn1
6HW&DQFHO
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
130
4
Touch [ ] to merge the pictures and save the resulting picture.
• The picture will be saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the
original picture with the closest focus distance, including the shutter speed, aperture, and
ISO sensitivity, will also be recorded to the new picture.
• The camera may automatically correct the misalignments of pictures caused by camera
shake. If they are corrected, the angle of view becomes slightly narrower when pictures are
merged.
• Pictures may be merged into an unnatural picture in the following cases:
– When the subject moves during recording
– When the distance between subjects is great
– When pictures are too defocused (If you take pictures with a larger aperture value, the
resulting picture may look less unnatural.)
• You may not be able to use Focus Stacking for images recorded with other devices.
131
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
Taking Pictures with Time Lapse Shot/
Stop Motion Animation
Applicable modes:
You can take pictures with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation. In addition, the
pictures taken can be combined into a motion picture.
• Set the date and time settings in advance. (P35)
The camera can automatically take pictures of subjects such as animals or plants as time
elapses and create a motion picture.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the menu.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching
[].
• After switching the drive mode dial to [ ], pressing [MENU/SET] will display the menu
with [Time Lapse/Animation] selected. (It displays in this state only once after switching
the drive mode dial.)
3
Press 3/4 to select an item and set.
¢1 Can be set only when [Shooting Interval Setting] is set to [ON].
• Recorded pictures are displayed as group pictures.
[Time Lapse Shot]
> [Rec] > [Time Lapse/Animation] >
[Mode] > [Time Lapse Shot]
[Shooting
Interval
Setting]
[ON]
Sets the time from recording start time to the next
recording start time.
[OFF]
After recording is finished, the next recording is started
without any interval.
[Start Time]
[Now] Starts the recording by fully-pressing the shutter button.
[Start Time
Set]
Any time up to 23 hours 59 minutes ahead can be set.
2/1: Select the item (hour/minute)
3/4: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
[Image Count]/
[Shooting
Interval]
¢1
The number of pictures and the recording interval can be set.
2/1: Select the item (minute/second/number of pictures)
3/4: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
MENU
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
132
• The estimated recording ending time is displayed on the setting screen.
It is displayed under the following conditions when [Shooting Interval Setting] is set to
[OFF]:
– Recording Mode: Shutter-Priority AE Mode or Manual Exposure Mode
– Focus Mode: [MF]
• The camera may not be able to record using the pre-set interval and number of pictures to
be recorded or may not finish recording at the estimated recording ending time under
some recording conditions.
4
Press the shutter button halfway.
• The recording screen will be displayed.
5
Press the shutter button halfway to focus and then press it
fully to take the picture.
• The recording starts automatically.
• During recording standby, the camera will turn off automatically if no operation is
performed for a certain period. The Time Lapse Shot is continued even with the camera
turned off. When the recording start time arrives, the camera turns on automatically.
To turn on the camera manually, press the shutter button halfway.
• Operations during recording standby (The camera is turned on)
¢2 When you record pictures by setting [Shooting Interval Setting] to [OFF], you can
press [Fn2] even while recording is in progress. After recording (exposure) of a
picture taken at the time when you pressed [Fn2] is finished, a selection screen is
displayed.
¢3 When you record pictures by setting [Shooting Interval Setting] to [OFF], you cannot
perform touch operation.
• After the recording stops, a confirmation screen will be displayed, asking whether to
proceed to create a motion picture.
To create a motion picture, select [Yes].
For information on creating motion pictures, refer to “Motion pictures using Time Lapse
Shot/Stop Motion Animation”. (P135)
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
[Fn2]
¢2
¢3
Displays a selection screen that lets you pause or stop
the recording.
Displays a selection screen that lets you resume or
stop the recording (during pause).
AFSAFS
L
4:3
133
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
A stop motion picture is created by splicing pictures together.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the menu.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching
[].
• After switching the drive mode dial to [ ], pressing [MENU/SET] will display the menu
with [Time Lapse/Animation] selected. (It displays in this state only once after switching
the drive mode dial.)
3
Press 3/4 to select an item and set.
4
Press the shutter button halfway.
• The recording screen will be displayed.
• This function is not for use in a security camera.
• [Time Lapse Shot] is paused in the following cases.
– When the charge on the battery runs out
– Turning the camera off
During [Time Lapse Shot], you can replace the battery and the card, and then restart by
turning on this unit. (Note that the pictures taken after replacing the card will be saved as a
separate set of group pictures.)
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] when replacing the battery or card.
• When [Shooting Interval] is set to a longer value, if the camera turns off automatically while
waiting for the next recording, we recommend that you use Time Lapse Shot in AF Mode.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
– When using [Multi Exp.]
Recording with Stop Motion Animation
> [Rec] > [Time Lapse/Animation] >
[Mode] > [Stop Motion Animation]
[Auto Shooting]
[ON] Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.
[OFF] This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.
[Shooting Interval]
(Only when [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON])
2/1: Select the item (second)
3/4: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
MENU
AFS
AFS
L
4:3
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
134
5
Press the shutter button halfway to focus and then
press it fully to take the picture.
6
(When taking the second and subsequent pictures)
Move the subject to decide on the composition and
then take the picture.(Repeat this)
• Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.
• If this unit is turned off while recording, a message for
resuming the recording is displayed when the camera is
turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to continue the recording from the interruption point.
7
Touch [ ] to end the recording.
• It can also be ended by selecting [Time Lapse/Animation]
from the [Rec] menu and then pressing [MENU/SET].
• When [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON], select [End] on the
confirmation screen.
(If [Pause] has been selected, press the shutter button fully
to resume the recording.)
• After the recording stops, a confirmation screen will be
displayed, asking whether to proceed to create a motion picture.
To create a motion picture, select [Yes].
For information on creating motion pictures, refer to “Motion pictures using Time Lapse
Shot/Stop Motion Animation”. (P135)
∫ Adding pictures to the Stop Motion Animation group
Selecting [Add to Picture Group] in step
3
will display group pictures recorded with [Stop
Motion Animation].
Select a set of group pictures, and then press [MENU/SET].
Recording materials skillfully
• The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them as
reference for the amount of movement.
• To check the recorded pictures, press [ ].
Unnecessary pictures can be deleted by pressing [ ].
To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
• Recording takes time under certain recording conditions, such as when the flash is used for
recording. Automatic recording, as a result, may not take place at set intervals.
• A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only one that was
taken.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following case:
– When using [Multi Exp.]
• [Auto Shooting] in [Stop Motion Animation] is not available for the following function:
– [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
30
135
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
After performing Time Lapse Shot or stop motion recording, you can proceed to create a
motion picture.
1
Select the methods for creating a motion picture.
2
Press 3/4 to select [OK] and then press [MENU/SET].
Motion pictures using Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation
[Rec Quality] Sets the quality of a motion picture.
[Frame Rate]
Sets the number of frames per second.
The larger the number is, the smoother the motion picture will be.
[Sequence]
[NORMAL]:
Splices pictures together in recording order.
[REVERSE]:
Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.
• You can also create motion pictures using [Time Lapse Video] (P252) or [Stop Motion Video]
(P252) in the [Playback] menu.
• When creating motion pictures with a [Rec Quality] setting of [4K], recording times are limited
to 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
– When using an SDHC Memory Card, you cannot create motion pictures with a file size
exceeding 4 GB.
– When using an SDXC Memory Card, you can create motion pictures with a file size
exceeding 4 GB.
• A motion picture with a [Rec Quality] setting of [FHD] or [HD] cannot be created if the
recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file size exceeds 4 GB.
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
136
Recording Using the Self-timer
Applicable modes:
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Press the shutter button halfway to focus
and then press it fully to take the picture.
• The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
• After the self-timer indicator flashes, recording starts.
∫ Setting the self-timer
> [Rec] > [Self Timer]
Picture is taken 10 seconds after shutter is pressed.
After 10 seconds the camera takes 3 pictures at about 2 seconds intervals.
Picture is taken 2 seconds after shutter is pressed.
• This setting is a convenient way to avoid camera blur caused by pressing the shutter
button.
• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.
Not available in these cases:
• [ ] is not available in the following cases.
– When [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When recording with Live View Composite
• The self-timer does not work in the following case:
– When recording motion pictures
MENU
137
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
Bracket Recording
Applicable modes:
You can take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting by pressing the
shutter button.
1
Select the menu.
2
Press 3/4 to select [More Settings] and then press [MENU/SET].
• For information on [More Settings], refer to the page that describes each function.
• Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
3
Focus on the subject and take a picture.
• When Exposure Bracket is selected, the bracket display flashes until all of the pictures
you have set are taken. If you change the bracket settings or turn off the camera before
all of the pictures you have set are taken, the camera restarts recording from the first
picture.
∫ To cancel [Bracket Type]
Select [OFF] in step
1
.
> [Rec] > [Bracket]> [Bracket Type]
Exposure Bracket
Press the shutter button to perform recording while
adjusting the exposure. (P138)
Aperture Bracket
Press the shutter button to perform recording while
adjusting the aperture. (P139)
• Available in Aperture-Priority AE Mode or when
the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] in Manual
Exposure Mode.
Focus Bracket
Press the shutter button to perform recording while
adjusting the focus position. (P139)
White Balance Bracket
Press the shutter button once to take three pictures
with different white balance settings automatically.
(P140)
MENU
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
138
∫ About [More Settings] (step
2
in P137)
¢ Not available for burst recording. When using burst recording, if you press and hold the
shutter button, recording will be performed continuously until a specified number of pictures
are taken.
[Step]: [3•1/3], [Sequence]: [0/s/r]
Not available in these cases:
• Bracket recording does not work in the following cases:
– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Soft Image of a Flower]
(Scene Guide Mode)
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording using the flash (except for White Balance Bracket)
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
• White Balance Bracket does not work in the following cases:
– Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
– Creative Control Mode
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
Exposure Bracket
[Step]
Sets the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure
compensation range.
[3•1/3] (Takes three pictures with an interval of 1/3 EV) to [7•1]
(Takes seven pictures with an interval of 1 EV)
[Sequence] Sets the order in which pictures are taken.
[Single Shot Setting]
¢
[ ]: Takes one picture each time you press the shutter button.
[ ]: Takes all the pictures set to be taken when you press the
shutter button once.
1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture
d0EV j1/3 EV i1/3 EV
• When taking pictures using Exposure Bracket after setting the Exposure Compensation value,
the pictures taken are based on the selected Exposure Compensation value.
139
5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings
Recording Mode:
∫ About [More Settings] (step
2
in P137)
• When using burst recording, if you press and hold the shutter button, recording will be
performed until a specified number of pictures are taken.
The available aperture values vary depending on the lens.
Example: when using the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060)
When the initial position is set to F8.0:
1 first picture, 2 second picture, 3 third picture... 7 seventh picture
∫ About [More Settings] (step
2
in P137)
¢ Not available for burst recording. When using burst recording, if you press and hold the
shutter button, recording will be performed continuously until a specified number of pictures
are taken.
A Focus: closer
B Focus: farther away
1 first picture, 2 second picture... 5 fifth picture...
Aperture Bracket
[Image Count]
[3], [5]: Takes a specified number of pictures with different aperture
values within the range based on the initial aperture value.
[ALL]: Takes pictures using all aperture values.
Focus Bracket
[Step]
Sets the interval between focus positions.
• The distance by which the focus position moves in each step will be
shorter if the initial position is closer to a subject, and conversely if the
initial position is farther from a subject, the distance will be longer.
[Image Count]
¢
Sets the number of pictures to be taken.
[Sequence]
[0/s/r]: Alternately moves the focus position closer and farther away
within the range centerd on the initial position as you take pictures.
[0/r]: Moves the focus position farther away from the initial position as
you take pictures.
[Sequence]: [0/s/r] [Sequence]: [0/r]
• Pictures taken with Focus Bracket are displayed as a set of group pictures.
4.0 5.6 8.0 11 16 22
・・・ ・・・
・・・
141
6.
Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Image Stabilizer
The camera can use both the in-body image stabilizer and the in-lens image stabilizer.
Of the Dual I.S. modes that effectively combine two image stabilizers, this supports Dual
I.S.2 ( , , ) with high correction efficiency.
Furthermore, during motion picture recording, you can use the 5-Axis Hybrid Image
Stabilizer that incorporates electronic stabilization.
• The image stabilizers to be activated differ depending on your lens. The icon for the currently
activated image stabilizer is displayed on the recording screen.
Attached lens
Available image
stabilizer
Icons displayed
When taking
pictures
When recording
motion pictures
Panasonic lenses
compatible with Dual I.S.
Mode
(Based on the Micro Four
Thirds System standard)
Lens + Body
(Dual I.S./Dual I.S.2)
// / /
Lenses compatible with the
image stabilizer function
(Based on the Micro Four
Thirds System standard)
Lens or Body /
Lenses not compatible with
the image stabilizer function
Body /
Lenses without function to
communicate with this
camera
Body /
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
142
• The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer function can be used with all lenses.
Set [E-Stabilization (Video)] in [Stabilizer] to [ON] in the [Rec] menu.
The recording screen displays the following icons when [ON] is set:
– Panasonic lenses compatible with Dual I.S. Mode: [ ]/[ ]
– Other than the above: [ ]
• If the recording screen icon is not indicated with [ ] or [ ] even when a supported
lens is being used, update the lens firmware to the latest version.
For the latest information on supported lenses or to download their firmware, refer to our
website. (P13)
∫ Using the Image Stabilizer
• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set it to [ON].
• When using lenses without a function for communicating with this camera, a message asking
you to check the focal length setting is displayed after you turn on the camera.
Correctly operating the image stabilization function requires that the focal length be set to
match the attached lens.
Set the focal length in accordance as prompted by the message.
This can also be set using the menu. (P144)
Preventing jitter (camera shake)
When the jitter alert [ ] appears, use [Stabilizer], a tripod, the self-timer or the shutter
remote control (DMW-RS2: optional).
• Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following cases. Keep the camera still from the
moment the shutter button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen.
We recommend using a tripod.
–Slow Sync.
– Slow Sync./Red-Eye Reduction
– [Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/
[Glittering Illuminations]/[Clear Night Portrait] (Scene Guide Mode)
– When you set to a slow shutter speed
143
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Applicable modes:
Set the image stabilizer movement to match the recording situation.
• When using an interchangeable lens with O.I.S. switch (such as H-FSA14140), stabilizer
function is activated if the O.I.S. switch of the lens is set to [ON]. ([ ] is set at the time of
purchase.)
Image Stabilizer Settings
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Stabilizer]
[Operation
Mode]
[]
(Normal)
Camera shake is corrected for up/down,
left/right, and rotational movements.
[]
(Panning)
Camera shake is corrected for up/down
movements.
This mode is ideal for panning (a method of
taking pictures which involves turning the
camera to track the movements of a
subject which continues to move in a fixed direction).
[OFF]
[Stabilizer] does not work. ([ ])
• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch to
[OFF].
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
Jitter during motion picture recording is corrected along the vertical,
horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes by making use of the In-Lens Image
Stabilizer, In-Body Image Stabilizer, and Electronic Image Stabilizer. (5-Axis
Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
[ON]/[OFF]
• The angle of view may become narrower if this is set to [ON].
MENU
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
144
1
Select the menu.
2
Enter a focal length.
2/1: Select the item (digit); 3/4: Setting
• A focal length ranging from 0.1 mm to 1000 mm can be
set.
3
Press [MENU/SET].
∫ Registering a focal length
1 Enter a focal length.
2 Press 1 to select the focal length to be overwritten and
then press [DISP.].
• Up to 3 focal length settings can be registered.
∫ Calling a registered focal length
Press 2/1 to select a registered focal length and then press
[MENU/SET].
[I.S. Lock
(Video)]
Allows you to enhance the image stabilization effect during motion picture
recording. This effect can keep the motion blur in the composition minimal
when you want to perform recording from a fixed perspective.
[ON]/[OFF]
• This effect works only during recording. [ ] is displayed on the
recording screen.
• To change the composition during recording, set to [OFF] first, and
then move the camera. Use the Fn button to switch between [ON]/[OFF]
during recording. (P56)
• In situations where the focal length becomes greater, such as when a
telephoto lens is attached, the stabilization effect will be weaker.
• The stabilization effect may be weak depending on the lens used.
• [I.S. Lock (Video)] is not available when using other manufacturer’s lenses
with an image stabilization function.
[Focal Length
Set]
When using lenses without a function for communicating with this camera,
manually set the focus length.
Setting the focal length of a lens
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Stabilizer] > [Focal Length Set]
MENU
145
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
• The Image Stabilizer may produce operational sound or cause vibration during its
operation, but these are not malfunctions.
• It is recommended to disable the Image Stabilizer when using a tripod.
• The stabilizer function may not be effective in the following cases.
– When there is a lot of jitter
– When the zoom magnification is high
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When taking pictures while following a moving subject
– When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places
• The panning effect in [ ] is more difficult to achieve in the following cases.
– In brightly lit places such as in broad daylight on a summer’s day
– When the shutter speed is faster than 1/100 of a second
– When you move the camera too slowly because the subject is moving slowly
(The background will not become a blur)
– When the camera does not keep up with the subject satisfactorily
Not available in these cases:
• In the following cases, the [Stabilizer] will switch to [ ] (Normal), even if it is set to [ ]
(Panning):
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
• In the following case, the [Stabilizer] will switch from [ ] to [ ] even when a compatible
lens is being used:
– In Slow & Quick Mode
• The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer function is not available in the following cases:
– When using the Digital Zoom
– In Slow & Quick Mode
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
146
Taking Pictures with the Zoom
Applicable modes:
You can zoom-in to make people and objects appear closer or zoom-out to record
landscapes, etc.
Optical zoom
T side: Enlarges distant subject
W side: Widens angle of view
Interchangeable lens
with a zoom ring
Rotate the zoom ring.
Interchangeable lens
that supports the
power zoom
(electrically operated
zoom)
Move the zoom lever.
(The zoom speed varies depending on
how far you move the lever.)
• If you assign [Zoom Control] to a Fn
button, you can operate the optical zoom
slowly by pressing 2/1 or fast by
pressing 3/4.
For information on how to operate, refer to step
2
and the
subsequent steps on P148.
Interchangeable lens
that does not support
the zoom
The optical zoom is not available.
T
W
T
W
147
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Applicable modes:
Extra Tele Conversion enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged without
deteriorating the picture quality.
Preparations:
∫ Maximum zoom magnifications when using Extra Tele Conversion
Raising the telescopic effect
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
• When taking pictures:
Set [Picture Size] to [ M] or [ S], and [Quality] to other than
[].
• When recording motion
pictures:
Set the size for [Rec Quality] to [FHD] or [HD].
When taking
pictures
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Rec])
1.3k: [ M] (When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [16:9])
1.4k: [ M] (When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3]/[3:2]/
[1:1])
2.0k: [ S]
When recording
motion pictures
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Motion Picture])
2.7k (motion pictures size is set to [FHD] in [Rec
Quality])
4.0k (motion pictures size is set to [HD] in [Rec
Quality])
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
148
∫ Increasing the zoom magnification in steps when taking pictures
1
Select the menu.
2
Set a Fn button to [Zoom Control]. (P56)
3
Press the Fn button.
4
Press 2/1 or 3/4.
• The zoom operation is terminated when the Fn button is pressed again or a certain
amount of time passes.
A Optical Zoom range (Focal length)
¢
B Extra Tele Conversion range (Zoom magnification)
¢ This zoom slider is displayed when using an
interchangeable lens that supports the power zoom.
• A constant zoom speed will be set.
• The indicated zoom magnification is an approximation.
• You can also operate the zoom by using touch zoom. (P151)
∫ Fixing the zoom magnification at the maximum level
> [Rec] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [ZOOM]
3/1: Tele (Enlarges distant subject)
4/2: Wide (Widens angle of view)
> [Rec] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [TELE CONV.]
> [Motion Picture] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [ON]
[OFF] [TELE CONV.]/[ON]
MENU
EX1.0x EX2.0x
4:3 4:3
MENU
MENU
4:3
4:3
149
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Applicable modes:
Although the image quality deteriorates every time you zoom in further, you can zoom in
up to four times the original zoom magnification.
(Continuous zooming is not possible.)
• If you assign [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, you can
display the Extra Tele Conversion setting screen for both pictures and motion pictures by
pressing the assigned Fn button. While this screen is displayed, you can change the [Picture
Size] setting by pressing [DISP.].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)
– When [Quality] is set to [ ]
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) is not available in the following case:
– [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture]) is not available during HDMI output. (Except in Creative
Video Mode)
[Digital Zoom]
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Digital Zoom] > [4t]/[2t]
• When using the Digital Zoom, we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer for taking
pictures.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop]/[Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
MENU
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
150
Applicable modes:
Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is
compatible with power zoom (electrically operated zoom).
Changing the settings for a power zoom lens
> [Custom] > [Lens / Others] > [Power Zoom Lens]
[Disp Focal
Length]
When you zoom, the focal distance is
displayed and you can confirm the zoom
position.
A Focal distance indication
B Current focal distance
[Step Zoom]
When you operate the zoom with this setting
[ON], the zoom will stop at positions
corresponding to predetermined distances.
C Step zoom indication
• This setting does not work when recording
motion pictures or recording with [4K
Pre-Burst].
[Zoom Speed]
You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.
• If you set [Step Zoom] to [ON], the zoom speed will not change.
[Photo]:
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)
[Video]:
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)
[Zoom Ring]
This may be selected when a power zoom-compatible lens with a zoom
lever and zoom ring is attached.
When set to [OFF], the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled
to prevent accidental operation.
MENU
151
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
You can change the zoom magnification of Extra Tele Conversion with touch operation
when using the optical zoom or taking pictures.
• When using an interchangeable lens that does not support power zoom (H-FS12060/
H-FSA14140), you can operate the zoom magnification of Extra Tele Conversion by setting [Ex.
Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) to [ZOOM].
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch [ ].
• The slide bar is displayed.
3
Perform zoom operations by dragging
the slide bar.
• The zoom speed varies depending on the touched
position.
• To end touch zoom operations, touch [ ] again.
Zooming using touch operations (Touch zoom)
[ ]/[ ] Zooms slowly
[ ]/[ ] Zooms quickly
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
152
Using a Flash
Applicable modes:
∫ Open/Close the built-in flash
A To open the flash
Slide the flash open lever.
• Be careful when opening the flash as the flash will jump
out.
B To close the flash
Press the flash until it clicks.
• Be careful not to catch your finger, etc.
• Forcibly closing the flash can damage the camera.
• Be sure to close the built-in flash when not in use.
∫ The available flash range (approximation)
When you use certain lenses, light from the flash may be blocked or fail to cover the
lens field of view, causing dark areas to appear in the resulting pictures.
The distance at which light from the flash is blocked by lens, and the distance to which
light from the flash is delivered vary depending on the lens used. Check the distance to the
subject when taking a picture.
• These ranges are obtained when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and [ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting] in [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is set to [AUTO].
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Wide Tele
0.5 m (1.6 feet) to 7.3 m (24 feet) 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to 4.5 m (15 feet)
When the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is used
Wide Tele
0.5 m (1.6 feet) to 7.3 m (24 feet) 0.5 m (1.6 feet) to 4.5 m (15 feet)
153
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
∫ About the use of external flashes
When using an external flash, the range of flash recording is broader than that of the
built-in flash.
• For information about external flashes whose operation has been confirmed, visit the
following support website:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(This Site is English only.)
Preparations:
• Close the built-in flash and set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
Using the flash skillfully
When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower portion of the photo may
turn dark and the control of the flash may be disabled because the photo flash may be
obscured by the lens hood. We recommend detaching the lens hood.
• Do not perform the following, as heat or light may cause the object to deform or discolor:
– Bringing any object near the flash
– Blocking the flash with your hand while it is firing
– Closing the flash while it is firing
• Do not close the flash immediately after a preliminary flash is fired by using a function such as
Forced On/Red-Eye. This may cause a malfunction.
• When the remaining battery power becomes low or the flash is fired continuously, it may take
time to charge the flash. While the flash is charging, the flash icon blinks red, and even if you
fully press the shutter button, recording is not possible.
• When an external flash is attached, it will have priority over the built-in flash.
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover
The camera comes with a hot shoe cover attached to the hot
shoe.
Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction
indicated by arrow 2 while pressing it in the direction
indicated by arrow 1.
• Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
154
When using other commercially available external flashes without
communication functions with the camera
• It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash. If you want to use the external flash
in Auto Mode, use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture value and the ISO
sensitivity to match the settings on the camera.
• Set to Aperture-Priority AE Mode or Manual Exposure Mode on the camera and then set the
same aperture value and ISO sensitivity on the external flash. (The exposure cannot be
compensated adequately due to the change on the aperture value in Shutter-Priority AE
Mode and the external flash cannot control the light adequately in Program AE Mode
because the aperture value cannot be fixed.)
• If you attach an external flash, you can use the following functions even when recording with
the flash:
– Aperture Bracket
– Focus Bracket
• You can set the aperture value, the shutter speed and the ISO sensitivity on the camera even
when attaching the external flash.
• If you record at close range with a wide angle, light from the flash may be blocked by the lens,
darkening the lower part of the screen.
• When using an external flash, do not use one with the opposite polarity or one with a function
for communicating with this camera.
It may cause the camera to malfunction, or it may not operate correctly.
• When attaching the external flash, do not hold only the external flash because it may detach
from the camera.
• Read the operating instructions of the external flash for details.
155
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Setting Flash Functions
You can set the flash function to control flash firing from the camera.
Applicable modes:
Select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually.
• This can be set when the built-in flash is used.
1
Select the menu.
2
(When [MANUAL] is selected)
Select the menu.
3
Press 2/1 to set the luminosity ratio and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/128] in steps of 1/3.
• Depending on the external flash used, there may be functions that cannot be set.
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Firing Mode]
[TTL] The camera automatically sets the flash output.
[MANUAL]
Set the luminosity ratio of the flash manually. In [TTL] you can shoot the
photograph you want even when shooting dark scenes that may
otherwise be too brightly lit by the flash.
• When [MANUAL] is set, the luminosity ratio ([1/1], etc.) is displayed on
the flash icon on the screen.
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Manual Flash Adjust.]
MENU
MENU
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
156
Applicable modes:
Set the flash to match the recording.
¢ Set [Flash] to the following settings:
– [Wireless]: [OFF]
– [Firing Mode]: [TTL]
• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode ( ), [ ] or [ ] can be set.
Refer to page 63 for information about flash settings during Intelligent Auto Mode ( or ).
The flash is activated twice.
The interval between the first and second flash is longer when [ ] or [ ] is
set. The subject should not move until the second flash is activated.
• The Red-Eye Reduction effect differs between people. Also, if the subject was far away from
the camera or was not looking at the first flash, the effect may not be evident.
∫ Shutter speed for each flash setting
¢ This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and B (Bulb) in the Manual Exposure
Mode.
• In Intelligent Auto ( or ) Mode, shutter speed changes depending on the identified
scene.
[Flash Mode]
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Mode]
(Forced Flash On)
(Forced On/Red-Eye)
¢
The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording
conditions.
• Use this when your subject is back-lit or under fluorescent
light.
(Slow Sync.)
(Slow Sync./
Red-Eye)
¢
When taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this
feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated.
Dark background landscape will appear brighter.
• Use this when you take pictures of people in front of a dark
background.
• Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. Using a
tripod can enhance your photos.
(Forced Flash Off) The flash is not fire.
Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.) Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.)
1/60
¢
to 1/200 1 to 1/200
MENU
157
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
∫ Available flash settings by Recording Mode
The available flash settings depend on the Recording Mode.
(±: Available, —: Not available,
¥
: Initial setting of Scene Guide Mode)
Recording Mode
Program AE Mode
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
±±±±±
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
Manual Exposure Mode
±±——±
Scene
Guide
Mode
[Clear Portrait]
±¥——±
[Silky Skin]
±¥——±
[Clear in Backlight]
¥ ———±
[Sweet Child's Face]
±¥——±
[Clear Night Portrait]
———¥±
[Soft Image of a Flower]
¥ ———±
[Appetizing Food]
¥ ———±
[Cute Dessert]
¥ ———±
[Freeze Animal Motion]
¥ ———±
[Clear Sports Shot]
¥ ———±
[Monochrome]
¥±±±±
• In the following cases, the flash mode is fixed to [ ]:
– When the flash is closed (except when an external flash is being used)
– [Backlit Softness]/[Relaxing Tone]/[Distinct Scenery]/[Bright Blue Sky]/[Romantic Sunset
Glow]/[Vivid Sunset Glow]/[Glistening Water]/[Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm
Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]
(Scene Guide Mode) (P77)
– When recording motion pictures (P163)
– When recording 4K photos (P115)
– When recording with the Post Focus function (P126)
– When using the electronic shutter (P203)
– When using [Filter Settings] (P196)
– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON] (P203)
– When [HDR] is set to [ON] (P205)
• The Scene Guide Mode flash setting is returned to the initial value with each change of scene.
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
158
Applicable modes:
When a moving subject is recorded at night using a slow shutter and flash, a trail of light
may appear in front of the subject.
If you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND], you can take a dynamic picture with a trail of light
appearing behind the subject by firing the flash immediately before the shutter closes.
Preparation: Set [Wireless] in [Flash] to [OFF].
[Flash Synchro]
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Synchro]
[1ST]
1st curtain synchro
The normal method when taking pictures with the flash.
[2ND]
2nd curtain synchro
The light source appears behind the subject and picture
becomes dynamic.
• [2nd] is displayed in the flash icon on the screen if you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND].
• When a fast shutter speed is set, the effect of [Flash Synchro] may deteriorate.
• You cannot set [ ] or [ ] when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND].
• The [Flash Synchro] settings also apply to an external flash.
MENU
159
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Applicable modes:
Adjust the flash brightness when pictures taken with the flash are over or underexposed.
Preparation: Set [Wireless] and [Firing Mode] in [Flash] to [OFF] and [TTL], respectively.
1
Select the menu.
2
Press 2/1 to set the flash output and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can adjust from [j3 EV] to [i3 EV] in steps of 1/3 EV.
• Select [n0] to return to the original flash output.
Applicable modes:
The flash output is automatically adjusted in accordance with the exposure compensation
value.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Adjusting the Flash Output
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Adjust.]
•[i] or [j] is displayed on the flash icon in the screen when the flash level is adjusted.
• The [Flash Adjust.] setting also applies to an external flash.
[Auto Exposure Comp.]
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Auto Exposure Comp.]
• For details on Exposure Compensation, refer to P104.
• The [Auto Exposure Comp.] settings also apply to an external flash.
MENU
MENU
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
160
Recording Using a Wireless Flash
Applicable modes:
When using external flashes that have wireless recording functionality, that functionality
allows you to separately control the firing of three flash groups and the built-in flash (or the
external flash attached to the hot shoe of the camera).
Preparation:
Slide the flash open lever on the camera to open the flash, or attach the external flash to
the camera.
1
Set the wireless flashes to RC Mode and then place them.
• Set a channel and groups for the wireless flash.
∫ Placing wireless flashes
Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera.
Placement example
When C is placed to erase the shadow in the background of the subject that the flash
groups A and B will create
• The placement range differs depending on the surrounding environment.
• We recommend using a maximum of three wireless flashes in each group.
• If the subject is too close, signal flashing may affect the exposure.
You can reduce the effect by setting [Communication Light] to [LOW] or lowering the output
with a diffuser or similar device.
A
B
C
161
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
2
Select the menu.
3
Press 3/4 to select an item and then
press [MENU/SET].
• To fire a test flash, press [DISP.].
A Flash output
B Luminosity ratio
C Firing Mode
¢1 Not available when [Wireless FP] is set to [ON].
¢2 Available when an external flash is attached.
> [Rec] > [Flash]
[Wireless]
Select [ON].
The flash icon on the screen will be indicated with [WL].
[Wireless Channel]
Select the channel you have set for the wireless flashes in
step
1
.
[Wireless Setup] Proceed to step
3
.
[Built-in
Flash]
¢1
/
[External
Flash]
¢1
[Firing
Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the output.
[AUTO]
¢2
: Flash output is set by the external flash.
[MANUAL]
¢2
: Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash
manually.
[OFF]: The flash on the camera side emits only
communication light.
[Flash
Adjust.]
Set the flash output of the camera manually when [Firing Mode] is
set to [TTL].
[Manual
Flash
Adjust.]
Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash when [Firing Mode] is
set to [MANUAL].
• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/128] in steps of 1/3.
[A Group]/
[B Group]/
[C Group]
[Firing
Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the output.
[AUTO]
¢1
: The wireless flashes automatically set the output.
[MANUAL]: Set the luminosity ratio of the wireless flashes
manually.
[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified group will
not fire.
[Flash
Adjust.]
Adjust the output of the wireless flashes manually when [Firing
Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual
Flash
Adjust.]
Set the luminosity ratio of the wireless flashes when [Firing Mode]
is set to [MANUAL].
• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/128] in steps of 1/3.
• Depending on the external flash used, there may be functions that cannot be set.
MENU
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
162
During wireless recording, an external flash fires an FP flash (high speed repetition of flash
firing). This firing allows recording with the flash at a fast shutter speed.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Set the strength of communication light.
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]
Using other settings for wireless flash recording
[Wireless FP]
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Wireless FP]
[Communication Light]
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Communication Light]
MENU
MENU
163
7.
Recording Motion Pictures
Recording Motion Picture
Applicable modes:
1
Start recording by pressing the motion
picture button.
A Elapsed recording time
B Available recording time
• Recording of motion picture appropriate for each mode
is possible.
• The recording state indicator (red) C will light up while
recording motion pictures.
• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.
• m: minute, s: second
2
Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again.
• With recording in a quiet environment, the sound of aperture and focus may be
recorded in motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.
The focus operation during recording of motion pictures can be set to [OFF] in
[Continuous AF] (P167).
If the operation sound of the motion picture button pressed to end recording bothers
you, try the following:
• Record the motion picture about three seconds longer, and then divide the last
part of the motion picture using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] menu.
• Use the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) to record.
R1
R1
m
37
37
s
R1
m
37
s
3
s
3
s
3
s
7. Recording Motion Pictures
164
• When the ambient temperature is high, the camera may display [ ] and then stop recording.
Wait until the camera cools down.
• ISO sensitivity operates as [AUTO] (for motion pictures) during motion picture recording. In
Creative Video Mode, you can set the ISO sensitivity for motion picture recording.
• You can display the available recording time before recording in Creative Video Mode.
• When the aspect ratio setting is different in still and motion pictures, the angle of view
changes at the start of motion picture recording.
When [Rec Area] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu is set to [ ], angle of view
during motion picture recording is displayed.
• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated
during the recording of a motion picture.
• The functions available when recording motion pictures differ according to the lens you are
using, and the operational sound of the lens may be recorded.
• Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after
recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.
• The Recording Mode will switch when you record motion pictures in the following Scene
Guide Modes.
Scene Guide Mode
Recording Mode while
recording motion picture
[Clear in Backlight]
Portrait Mode
[Clear Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/[Handheld Night
Shot]/[Clear Night Portrait]
Low Light Mode
Not available in these cases:
• Motion pictures cannot be recorded in the following cases.
– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative
Control Mode)
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When taking pictures with [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
165
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Sets the image quality of videos to be recorded.
This camera can record motion pictures in 4K (3840k2160) or full high-definition
(1920k1080) resolution.
• With camera models DC-G97P/DC-G97PP:
¢1 4K motion pictures
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
¢2 4K motion pictures
[Rec Quality]
> [Motion Picture] > [Rec Quality]
[Rec Quality] Size Recording frame rate Sensor output Bit rate
[4K/100M/30p]
¢1
3840k2160 30p 30 frames/second 100 Mbps
[4K/100M/24p]
¢1
3840k2160 24p 24 frames/second 100 Mbps
[FHD/28M/60p] 1920k1080 60p 60 frames/second 28 Mbps
[FHD/20M/30p] 1920k1080 30p 30 frames/second 20 Mbps
[HD/10M/30p] 1280k720 30p 30 frames/second 10 Mbps
[Rec Quality] Size Recording frame rate Sensor output Bit rate
[4K/100M/30p]
¢2
3840k2160 30p 30 frames/second 100 Mbps
[4K/100M/25p]
¢2
3840k2160 25p 25 frames/second 100 Mbps
[4K/100M/24p]
¢2
3840k2160 24p 24 frames/second 100 Mbps
[FHD/28M/60p] 1920k1080 60p 60 frames/second 28 Mbps
[FHD/28M/50p] 1920k1080 50p 50 frames/second 28 Mbps
[FHD/20M/30p] 1920k1080 30p 30 frames/second 20 Mbps
[FHD/20M/25p] 1920k1080 25p 25 frames/second 20 Mbps
[HD/10M/30p] 1280k720 30p 30 frames/second 10 Mbps
[HD/10M/25p] 1280k720 25p 25 frames/second 10 Mbps
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
166
∫ About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures
Motion pictures recorded on this camera in MP4 format may not be played back even on
devices that support MP4 format. In other cases, the motion pictures may be played back
with poor image or sound quality or their recording information may not be displayed
correctly. In these cases, play them back on the camera.
• The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera
employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the
subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is
recorded.
• When [Miniature Effect] is selected for Creative Control Mode, you cannot select the items
used for 4K motion pictures.
• When recording motion pictures in 4K, use a card rated as UHS Speed Class 3.
• When you record 4K motion pictures, the angle of view will be narrower than motion pictures
of other sizes.
• To ensure highly accurate focus, 4K motion pictures are recorded at reduced AF speeds.
It may be difficult to focus on the subject with AF, but this is not a malfunction.
• Refer to P318 for information about continuous recordable times.
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
Depending on the TV to be connected, MP4 motion pictures recorded with [4K/100M/30p],
[FHD/28M/60p], [FHD/20M/30p] or [HD/10M/30p] may not be played back correctly.
167
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Applicable modes:
You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording motion pictures.
[Continuous AF]
> [Motion Picture] > [Continuous AF]
Focus mode [Continuous AF] Description of settings
[AFS]/[AFF]/
[AFC]
[ON]
The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects
during recording.
[OFF]
The camera maintains the focus position at the start of
recording.
[MF] [ON]/[OFF] You can focus manually.
• When the focus mode is set to [AFS], [AFF] or [AFC], if you press the shutter button halfway
while recording a motion picture, the camera will re-adjust the focus.
• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, operational sound may be recorded
when the AF is operated while recording a motion picture.
It is recommended to record with [Continuous AF] in the [Motion Picture] menu set to [OFF],
if the sound of operation bothers you to avoid recording the lens noise.
• When operating the zoom while recording motion pictures, it may take time to come into
focus.
Not available in these cases:
• [Continuous AF] does not work in the following case:
– When [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is operating
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
168
Applicable modes:
You can fine-adjust the focusing method for motion picture recording using [Continuous
AF].
Preparation: Set [Continuous AF] to [ON].
Applicable modes:
You can perform log recording by setting [Photo Style] to [V-Log L]. It allows you to create
images finished with rich gradation through post production editing.
1
Select the menu.
2
Press 2/1 to select [V-Log L] and then press [MENU/SET].
• The recording screen and images output via HDMI will appear darker overall.
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
> [Motion Picture] > [AF Custom Setting(Video)]
[ON] Enables the following settings.
[OFF] Disables the following settings.
[SET]
[AF Speed]
[r] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.
[s] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.
[AF Sensitivity]
[r] side: When the distance to the subject changes significantly,
the camera immediately readjusts the focus.
[s] side: When the distance to the subject changes significantly,
the camera waits for a little before readjusting the focus.
Log recording (V-Log L)
> [Motion Picture] > [Photo Style]
• Post-production processing is enabled by utilizing LUT (Look-Up Table).
You can download LUT file from the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index3.html
(English only.)
This camera records motion pictures in 4:2:0/8 bit, so after post-production
editing, luminance and color unevenness or noise may appear in areas such as
blue skies, people’s skin, and white walls.
We recommend performing trial recording in advance and editing and checking
post-production images before proceeding to actual recording.
MENU
MENU
169
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Applicable modes:
You can record still pictures while recording a motion picture. (Simultaneous recording)
During motion picture recording, press the shutter
button fully to record a still picture.
• Simultaneous recording indicator is displayed while recording
still pictures.
• Recording with the Touch Shutter function is also available.
∫ Setting the motion picture priority or still picture priority mode
Applicable modes:
Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures
> [Motion Picture] > [Picture Mode in Rec.]
[]
(Video Priority)
• Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the [Rec Quality]
setting for motion pictures.
• Only JPEG images are recorded when [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or
[].
(When set to [ ], still pictures will be recorded in [Quality] of [ ].)
• You can take up to 40 still pictures.
(Up to 10 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
[]
(Photo Priority)
• Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
• The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be
recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
• You can take up to 10 still pictures.
(Up to 5 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
• The picture aspect ratio will be fixed to [16:9].
Not available in these cases:
• When [ ] (Photo Priority) is set, simultaneous recording is not possible in the following
cases:
– When [Rec Quality] is set to a motion picture item with a frame rate of [24p]
– When the drive mode is set to 4K Photo
– When using [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Motion Picture] menu
• Simultaneous recording is not possible when [Snap Movie] is set to [ON].
13
13
13
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
170
Applicable modes:
You can specify the recording time in advance and record motion pictures casually like you
take snapshots. The function also allows you to shift a focus at the start of recording and
add fade in/out effects in advance.
• With camera models DC-G97P/DC-G97PP:
Motion pictures will be recorded with [FHD/20M/30p].
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
Motion pictures will be recorded with [FHD/20M/25p].
1
Select the menu.
• Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
2
Start recording by pressing the motion picture
button.
A Elapsed recording time
B Set recording time
• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.
• You cannot stop motion picture recording in the middle.
The recording will stop automatically when the set
recording time has elapsed.
∫ To cancel Snap Movie
Select [OFF] in step
1
.
[Snap Movie]
> [Motion Picture] > [Snap Movie] > [ON]
MENU
3
s
3
s
3
s
SNAP
4SEC
4
s
4
s
4
s
171
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Snap Movie settings
> [Motion Picture] > [Snap Movie] > [SET]
[Record time] Sets the recording time of motion pictures.
[Pull Focus]
Shifts focus gradually at the start of recording for more dramatic imaging
expression. (P172)
[Fade]
Adds a fade-in (gradual appearance) effect to an image and audio as
recording starts or adds a fade-out (gradual disappearance) effect to them
as recording ends.
[WHITE-IN]/[WHITE-OUT]:
Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a white screen.
[BLACK-IN]/[BLACK-OUT]:
Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a black screen.
[COLOR-IN]/[COLOR-OUT]:
Adds an effect that fades in from black-and-white to color or an effect that
fades out from color to black-and-white. Audio will be recorded normally.
[OFF]
• Motion pictures recorded with [WHITE-IN] or [BLACK-IN] are displayed as all-white or
all-black thumbnails in Playback Mode.
• If you set [Snap Movie] in [Fn Button Set] (P56) of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu and then
press the Fn button, a screen that lets you switch [Snap Movie] between [ON]/[OFF] is
displayed. You can change the settings of Snap Movie by pressing [DISP.] in this switching
screen display.
• [Snap Movie] will be set to [OFF] when you connect to Wi-Fi with [Remote Shooting & View].
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
172
∫ Setting [Pull Focus]
Set the frames that specify the positions where the [Pull
Focus] starts (first position) and stops (second position).
1
Press 2.
2
Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to move the AF area frame, and
press [MENU/SET]. (First position)
• If you press [DISP.] before pressing [MENU/SET], the frame will return to the center.
3
Repeat step
2
. (Second position)
• Press [MENU/SET] to cancel the second frame position setting.
Touch a subject (first position), drag your finger to the desired location (second
position), and release the finger.
• If you touch [ ], the frame settings will be canceled.
Button operation
Touch operation
• A greater effect can be achieved by creating a striking contrast of focus between the
start and end positions, for example by shifting focus from the background to
foreground, or vice versa.
• After setting focus, try to keep the distance between the subject and the camera
constant.
• When the camera fails to set the frame, it returns to the first position.
• When [Pull Focus] is set to [ON]:
– AF Mode will be switched to [ ], a setting specially designed for [Pull Focus].
– During picture taking, AF operates as [ ] at the first frame position.
• When the [Metering Mode] (P198) is set to [ ], the spot metering target is set at the first
frame.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
–During MF
– When using the Digital Zoom
173
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Applicable modes:
Display the sound recording level on the recording screen.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• When [Sound Rec Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Sound Rec Level Disp.] is fixed to [ON].
Applicable modes:
Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (j12 dB to i6dB).
• Displayed dB values are approximate.
Applicable modes:
The camera adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimizing the sound distortion
(crackling noise) when the volume is too high.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Displaying/Setting the Sound Recording Level
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
> [Motion Picture] > [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
> [Motion Picture] > [Sound Rec Level Adj.]
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]
> [Motion Picture] > [Sound Rec Level Limiter]
MENU
MENU
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
174
Creative Video Mode
Recording Mode:
It is possible to manually change the aperture, shutter speed and ISO sensitivity and
record motion pictures.
The following motion pictures can only be recorded in Creative Video Mode:
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the menu.
• The operation for changing the aperture value or shutter speed is the same as the
operation for setting the mode dial to , , or .
• Program Shift does not work.
3
Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start recording.
• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is
operated during the recording of a motion picture.
Using touch icons allows silent operation while recording motion pictures.
[4K Live Cropping] P176
> [Creative Video] > [Exposure Mode] > [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch icon.
: Zoom
¢
: Aperture value
: Shutter speed
: Exposure Compensation
: ISO sensitivity
: Sound rec level adjustment
¢ When using an interchangeable lens that supports power zoom (electronic zoom)
3 Drag the slide bar to set.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting
slowly
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting
quickly
MENU
P
F
SS
ISO
175
7. Recording Motion Pictures
4
Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) again to stop
recording.
∫ [AUTO] ISO sensitivity settings
Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to [AUTO].
> [Motion Picture] > [ISO Sensitivity (video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] [AUTO]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
176
By cropping your motion picture down from the 4K angle of view to Full High Definition,
you can record a motion picture that pans and zooms in/out while leaving the camera in a
fixed position.
• With camera models DC-G97P/DC-G97PP:
[Rec Quality] in the [Motion Picture] menu will be fixed to [FHD/20M/30p].
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
[Rec Quality] in the [Motion Picture] menu will be fixed to [FHD/20M/30p]/[FHD/20M/25p].
• Hold the camera firmly in place while recording.
• The angle of view becomes narrower.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the menu.
3
Set the cropping start frame.
A Cropping start frame
• When making settings for the first time, a cropping start
frame of size 1920k1080 is displayed. (After setting the
cropping start frame and end frame, the start frame and
end frame that you set immediately before will be
displayed.)
• The camera will remember the frame position and size
even when the camera is turned off.
[4K Live Cropping]
Pan Zoom in
> [Creative Video] > [4K Live Cropping] > [40SEC]/[20SEC]
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Moves the frame.
/ s
Enlarges/reduces the
frame in small steps.
The range of
settings allowed is
from 1920k1080 to
3840k2160.
Pinching out/in
Enlarges/reduces the
frame.
[DISP.] [Reset]
Returns the position of the frame to the center
and its size to the default setting.
[MENU/SET] [Set] Decides the position and size of the frame.
MENU
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
177
7. Recording Motion Pictures
4
Set the cropping end frame.
B Cropping end frame
5
Press the motion picture button (or shutter button)
to start recording.
C Elapsed recording time
D Set operating time
• Immediately release the motion picture button (or the
shutter button) after pressing it.
• When the set operating time has elapsed, recording
automatically ends.
To end recording midway, press the motion picture button
(or the shutter button) again.
∫ Changing the position and size of a crop frame
Press 2 while the recording screen is displayed, and perform steps
3
and
4
.
∫ To cancel [4K Live Cropping] recording
Set [4K Live Cropping] to [OFF] in step
2
.
To add zoom in/out effects, set different angles of view for the cropping start and
end frames. For example, to zoom in while recording, set a larger angle of view
for the start frame and a smaller angle of view for the end frame.
• The setting of the AF Mode switches to [ ]. (The eye to be in focus is not indicated.)
• Brightness is measured and focus is done in the cropping start frame. During motion picture
recording, they are done in the crop frame. To lock the focus position, set [Continuous AF] to
[OFF], or set the Focus Mode to [MF].
• [Metering Mode] will be [ ] (Multiple).
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
7
s
7
s
7
s
20
s
20
s
20
s
7. Recording Motion Pictures
178
Slow & Quick Mode
Applicable modes:
Records slow-motion videos and quick-motion videos.
• The [Rec Quality] is recorded with [FHD].
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the recording settings.
3
Press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
4
Press the motion picture button or shutter button to start recording.
5
Press the motion picture button or shutter button again to stop
recording.
> [Slow & Quick] > [S&Q
Exposure Mode]/[S&Q Recording
Frame Rate]/[S&Q Effect]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching
the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
MENU
179
7. Recording Motion Pictures
∫ Operations During Video Recording
You can change settings like exposure with touch operation.
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch an icon.
3
Drag the slide bar to set the item.
Select the exposure mode.
Settings: [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
• You can perform the same exposure operations as the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] modes.
• Program Shift does not work.
Select the recording frame rate.
• With camera models DC-G97P/DC-G97PP:
Settings: [60p]/[30p]
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
Settings: [60p]/[50p]/[30p]/[25p]
: Zoom
¢1
: Aperture value
: Shutter speed
: Exposure Compensation
: ISO sensitivity
: S&Q Effect
¢2
¢1 When using an interchangeable lens that supports power zoom (electronic zoom)
¢2 This cannot be operated during recording.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly
• If you touch icon (A), the screen of
Step
2
is redisplayed.
• Audio is not recorded in videos.
Slow & Quick Menu
[S&Q Exposure Mode]
> [Slow & Quick] > [S&Q Exposure Mode]
[S&Q Recording Frame Rate]
> [Slow & Quick] > [S&Q Recording Frame Rate]
F
SS
ISO
MENU
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
180
Select the speed effect.
• With camera models DC-G97P/DC-G97PP:
¢1 When [S&Q Recording Frame Rate] is set to [60p], the angle of view becomes narrower.
¢2 It can only be selected when [S&Q Recording Frame Rate] is set to [30p]. (The angle of view
becomes narrower.)
[S&Q Effect]
> [Slow & Quick] > [S&Q Effect]
[8xQUICK]
Records videos sped up to about
8-times speed.
Example:
When set to [60p]: 8 frames/second.
When set to [30p]: 4 frames/second.
Quick motion video
[4xQUICK]
Records videos sped up to about
4-times speed.
[2xQUICK]
Records videos sped up to about
2-times speed.
[2xSLOW]
¢1
Records videos slowed down to about
half speed.
Slow motion video
[4xSLOW]
¢2
Records videos slowed down to about
1/4 speed.
MENU
181
7. Recording Motion Pictures
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
¢3 When [S&Q Recording Frame Rate] is set to [60p]/[50p], the angle of view becomes
narrower.
¢4 It can only be selected when [S&Q Recording Frame Rate] is set to [30p]/[25p]. (The angle
of view becomes narrower.)
[8xQUICK]
Records videos sped up to about
8-times speed.
Example:
When set to [60p]: 8 frames/second.
When set to [50p]: 6 frames/second.
When set to [30p]: 4 frames/second.
When set to [25p]: 3 frames/second.
Quick motion video
[4xQUICK]
Records videos sped up to about
4-times speed.
[2xQUICK]
Records videos sped up to about
2-times speed.
[2xSLOW]
¢3
Records videos slowed down to about
half speed.
Slow motion video
[4xSLOW]
¢4
Records videos slowed down to about
1/4 speed.
• Depending on the settings, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.
• The shutter speeds that can be set vary depending on [S&Q Recording Frame Rate], [S&Q
Effect], and the focus mode.
182
8.
Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Pictures
1
Press [ ].
2
Press 2/1.
• If you press and hold 2/1, you can play back the
pictures in succession.
• You can also perform this step by operating the camera
as below.
∫ To finish playback
Press [ ] again or press the shutter button halfway.
2
: Play back the previous picture
1
: Play back the next picture
Sending images
• Rotate the front dial or the control dial.
• Drag the screen horizontally.
Sending images
continuously
• After dragging to change the image,
leave your finger touching the left or
right edge of the screen.
Not available in these cases:
• This camera complies with the DCF standard “Design rule for Camera File system”
established by JEITA “Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association”
and with Exif “Exchangeable Image File Format”.
This camera can only display pictures that comply with the DCF standard.
• The camera may not play back images recorded on other devices correctly, and the functions
of the camera may not be available for the images.
1/981/98
1/98
1/98
183
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Motion Pictures
This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the MP4 format.
Select an icon indicated with [ ], and then press
3 to play it back.
A Motion picture recording time
• After playback starts, the elapsed playback time is displayed on
the screen.
For example, 8 minutes and 30 seconds is displayed as
[8m30s].
• Touching [ ] in the middle of the screen allows you to play back motion pictures.
• Motion pictures recorded with [Snap Movie] are played back automatically.
∫ Operations during Motion Picture Playback
¢ The fast forward/rewind speed increases if you press 1/2 again.
∫ Operations during automatic Snap Movie playback
• If you touch the screen, automatic playback will stop.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3 Play/Pause 4 Stop
2
Fast rewind
¢
1
Fast forward
¢
Frame-by-frame
rewind
(while pausing)
Frame-by-frame
forward
(while pausing)
Reduce volume level
Increase volume
level
3 Playback from the beginning
2 Back to previous picture
1 Ahead to next picture
12s12s
12s
12s
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
184
Extract one frame of a motion picture and save it as a JPEG image.
1
Press 3 to pause motion picture playback.
• Press 2/1 to fine-adjust the pause position while the motion picture is paused.
2
Press [MENU/SET].
• The same operation can be performed by touching
[].
Extracting a Picture
• Still pictures will be saved with [Aspect Ratio] set to [16:9] and [Quality] set to [ ].
The number of pixels will differ according to the motion picture you play back.
Motion picture recording quality
Picture size of the picture to be
saved
[4K] 3840k2160
[FHD]/[HD] 1920k1080
• Still pictures created from a motion picture may be coarser than with normal picture quality.
• [ ] is displayed during playback of still pictures created from motion pictures.
185
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Switching the Display Mode
Playback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom).
• Each time you touch the screen twice, the display switches between enlarged and normal view.
• Images recorded with [Quality] set to [ ] can be enlarged up to 8k.
Enlarged Display
Rotate the rear dial right.
1
k
> 2
k
> 4
k
> 8
k
> 16
k
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
s Enlarges/reduces the screen.
s Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
3/4/2/1 Dragging Moves the enlarged area.
/ s
Forwards or rewinds the image while maintaining the same
zoom magnification and zoom position.
Thumbnail Screen
Rotate the rear dial left.
1 screen > 12 screens > 30 screens > Calendar display
• If the rear dial is rotated to the right, the previous playback
screen will be displayed.
• It is possible to switch the playback screen by touching the
following icons.
– [ ]: 1 screen
– [ ]: 12 screens
– [ ]: 30 screens
– [ ]: Calendar display
• You can also scroll the list display by dragging the screen up/down.
• Pictures displayed using [ ] cannot be played back.
∫ To return to Normal Playback
Select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you select a motion picture, it will be played back automatically.
2.0X2.0X2.0X2.0X
CAL
1/98
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
186
Calendar Playback
1
Rotate the rear dial left to display the Calendar display.
2
Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the recording date and
press [MENU/SET].
• Only the images recorded on that date will be displayed.
• Rotate the rear dial left to return to the Calendar display.
3
Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select a picture and then press
[MENU/SET].
• The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected
when the Calendar screen is first displayed.
• You can display the Calendar between January 2000 and December 2099.
• If the date is not set in the camera, the recording date is set as January 1st, 2025.
• If you take pictures after setting the travel destination in [World Time], the pictures are
displayed by the dates at the travel destination in Calendar Playback.
187
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Group Images
A picture group consists of multiple pictures. You can play back pictures in a group either
continuously or one by one.
• You can edit or delete all pictures in a group at once.
(For example, if you delete a picture group, all pictures in the group are deleted.)
∫ Playing back group pictures one by one
1
Press
4
.
• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ],
[], [], or [].
2
Press
2
/
1
to flip through images.
• To return to the normal playback screen, press 4 again or touch [ ].
• Each picture in a group can be treated same as normal pictures when they are played
back. (Such as thumbnail screen, enlarged display and deleting images)
[]:
A picture group saved at once with [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving].
[]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken with Focus
Bracket.
[]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken in a Time Lapse
Shot.
[]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken in the Stop
Motion Animation.
• Pictures will not be grouped if recorded without setting the clock.
1/981/981/981/98
SLF
SLF
SLF
1/981/98
1/98
1/98
SLF
SLF
SLF
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
188
∫ Continuously playing back Group Pictures
Press
3
.
• The same operation can be performed by touching the group picture icon ([ ], [ ],
[]).
• When playing back group pictures one at a time, options are displayed.
After selecting [Burst Play] (or [Sequential Play]), select either of the following playback
methods:
[From the first picture]:
Pictures are played back continuously from the first picture of the group.
[From the current picture]:
Pictures are played back continuously from the picture being played back.
• Operations during continuous playback
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3
Continuous
playback/Pause
4 Stop
2
Fast rewind
1
Fast forward
Rewind
(while pausing)
Forward
(while pausing)
189
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Deleting Images
Once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered.
∫ To delete a single picture
1
In Playback Mode, select the picture to delete and
then press [ ].
• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].
2
Press
3
to select [Delete Single] and then press [MENU/SET].
∫ To delete multiple pictures (up to 100)
• Picture groups are treated as a single picture. (All the pictures in the selected picture group will
be deleted.)
1
In Playback Mode, press [ ].
2
Press
3
/
4
to select [Delete Multi] and then press [MENU/SET].
3
Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the picture, and then press
[MENU/SET] to set. (Repeat this step.)
• [ ] appears on the selected pictures.
To cancel the selection, press [MENU/SET] again.
4
Press [DISP.] to execute.
• Depending on the number of pictures to be deleted, it may take some time to delete them.
OK
ュリヴヱハ
190
9.
Menu Guide
Given below is the list of menus. Menus explained in detail on other pages are indicated
with page numbers.
• For information about menu operation methods, refer to page 51.
• For information about methods of entering text, refer to page 60.
Menus that are only available for particular
Recording Modes
You can change the settings registered to custom sets. (P76)
Menus that are only available for
particular Recording Modes
P190 A
[Rec] menu
P191
B
[Motion Picture] menu
P207
[Custom] menu
P210
[Setup] menu
P226
[My Menu] menu
P236
[Playback] menu
P237
: [Intelligent Auto] menu
• [Intelligent Auto Mode] (P62)
• [iHandheld Night Shot] (P64)
• [iHDR] (P64)
: [Creative Video] menu
• [Exposure Mode] (P174) • [4K Live Cropping] (P176)
: [Slow & Quick] menu
• [S&Q Exposure Mode] (P179)
• [S&Q Recording Frame Rate] (P179)
• [S&Q Effect] (P180)
: [Custom Mode] menu
191
9. Menu Guide
[Rec] menu
¢ Menu items common to the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu. Setting changes will be
applied to the settings of both menus.
: [Scene Guide] menu
• [Scene Switch] (P77)
: [Creative Control] menu
• [Filter Effect] (P81) • [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] (P81)
• [Aspect Ratio] (P192)
•[Picture Size] (P192)
• [Quality] (P193)
• [AFS/AFF] (P88)
¢
• [AF Sensitivity(Photo)] (P89)
• [Photo Style] (P194)
¢
• [Filter Settings] (P196)
¢
• [Color Space] (P197)
• [Metering Mode] (P198)
¢
• [Highlight Shadow] (P198)
¢
•[i.Dynamic] (P199)
¢
• [i.Resolution] (P200)
¢
• [Flash] (P156)
• [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] (P200)
• [Min. Shtr Speed] (P201)
• [Long Shtr NR] (P201)
• [Shading Comp.] (P202)
• [Diffraction Compensation] (P202)
¢
• [Stabilizer] (P141)
¢
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P147)
• [Digital Zoom] (P149)
¢
• [Burst Rate] (P112)
•[4K PHOTO] (P115)
•[Self Timer] (P136)
• [Time Lapse/Animation] (P131, 133)
• [Live View Composite] (P72)
• [Silent Mode] (P203)
• [Shutter Type] (P203)
• [Shutter Delay] (P204)
• [Bracket] (P137)
• [HDR] (P205)
•[Multi Exp.] (P206)
9. Menu Guide
192
Applicable modes:
You can select the image aspect ratio.
Applicable modes:
Sets the picture’s image size.
[Aspect Ratio]
> [Rec] > [Aspect Ratio]
[4:3] [Aspect Ratio] of a 4:3 TV
[3:2] [Aspect Ratio] of a 35 mm film camera
[16:9] [Aspect Ratio] of a 16:9 TV
[1:1] Square aspect ratio
[Picture Size]
> [Rec] > [Picture Size]
Aspect
ratio
Image size
Aspect
ratio
Image size
[4:3]
[L] (20M) 5184k3888
[16:9]
[L] (14.5M) 5184k2920
[ M] (10M) 3712k2784 [M] (8M) 3840k2160
[ S] (5M) 2624k1968 [S] (2M) 1920k1080
[3:2]
[L] (17M) 5184k3456
[1:1]
[L] (14.5M) 3888k3888
[ M] (9M) 3712k2480 [M] (7.5M) 2784k2784
[ S] (4.5M) 2624k1752 [S] (3.5M) 1968k1968
• When [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) is set, [ ] is displayed on the picture sizes of each aspect ratio
except for [L].
Not available in these cases:
• [Picture Size] cannot be set in the following cases:
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
MENU
MENU
193
9. Menu Guide
Applicable modes:
Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.
[Quality]
> [Rec] > [Quality]
Settings File format Description of settings
[]
JPEG
A JPEG image in which image quality was given priority.
[]
A standard image quality JPEG image.
This is useful for increasing the number of shots without
changing the number of pixels.
[]
RAWiJPEG
You can record a RAW image and a JPEG image ([ ] or
[ ]) simultaneously.
[]
[] RAW You can only record RAW images.
About RAW
RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed. Playback
and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated software.
• You can process RAW images in [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu.
• Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Adwaa) to process and edit RAW files on a
PC. (P283)
• RAW images are always recorded in the [4:3] (5184k3888) aspect ratio.
• When you delete an image recorded with [ ] or [ ], both the RAW and JPEG
images will be deleted simultaneously.
• When you play back an image recorded with [ ], gray areas corresponding to the aspect
ratio at the time of recording are displayed.
• The setting is fixed to [ ] when recording is performed with the 4K Photo or Post Focus
function.
Not available in these cases:
• In the following cases, [ ], [ ], and [ ] cannot be set.
– [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
MENU
9. Menu Guide
194
Applicable modes:
You can select effects to match the type of image you wish to record.
[Photo Style]
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Photo Style]
[Standard] This is the standard setting.
[Vivid] Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
[Natural] Soft effect with low contrast.
[Monochrome] Monochrome effect with no color shades.
[L.Monochrome]
Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black
accents.
[L.Monochrome D]
Monochrome effect that creates a dynamic impression with
enhanced highlights and shadows.
[Scenery]
An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and
greens.
[Portrait]
An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful
skin tone.
[Custom] Use the setting registered in advance.
[Cinelike D]
An effect that creates a film-like finishing touch using a gamma
curve and gives priority to the dynamic range.
• This function is suitable for motion picture editing processes.
[Cinelike V]
Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed
to create film-like images.
[V-Log L]
A gamma curve effect designed for post production editing.
• It allows you to add rich gradation to images during post
production editing.
• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode:
– Only [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.
– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to another Recording
Mode or this unit is turned off.
– Image quality cannot be adjusted.
• In Scene Guide Mode, you can only set the image quality.
MENU
195
9. Menu Guide
∫ Adjusting the picture quality
1
Press
2
/
1
to select the type of Photo Style.
2
Press
3
/
4
to select the items, and then press
2
/
1
to adjust.
• You can register adjusted details to [Custom] by pressing
[DISP.].
¢1 It cannot be adjusted when [V-Log L] is set.
¢2 Not displayed when [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected.
¢3 Displayed only when [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected.
• If you adjust the picture quality, [_] is displayed beside the Photo Style icon on the screen.
3
Press [MENU/SET].
[Contrast]
¢1
[r]
Increases the difference between the brightness
and the darkness in the picture.
[s]
Decreases the difference between the brightness
and the darkness in the picture.
[Sharpness]
[r] The picture is sharply defined.
[s] The picture is softly focused.
[Noise Reduction]
[r]
The noise reduction effect is enhanced.
Picture resolution may deteriorate slightly.
[s]
The noise reduction effect is reduced. You can
obtain pictures with higher resolution.
[Saturation]
¢1, 2
[r] The colors in the picture become vivid.
[s] The colors in the picture become natural.
[Color Tone]
¢3
[r] Adds a bluish tone.
[s] Adds a yellowish tone.
[Filter Effect]
¢3
[Yellow] The blue sky can be recorded clearly.
[Orange] The blue sky can be recorded in darker blue.
[Red] The blue sky can be recorded in much darker blue.
[Green]
The skin and lips of people appear in natural tones.
Green leaves appear brighter and more enhanced.
[Off] —
[Grain Effect]
¢3
[Low]/
[Standard]/
[High]
Sets the graininess in a picture.
[Off] —
DISP.カスタム登録
-
5
-
500
+5+5
±0
±0
S
±0
±0
6WDQGDUG
S
9. Menu Guide
196
Applicable modes:
You can add the image effects (filters) of Creative Control Mode. (P80)
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]
∫ Setting a Filter with Touch Operation
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item you want to set.
• The effect of [Grain Effect] cannot be checked on the recording screen.
Not available in these cases:
• [Grain Effect] is not available in the following cases.
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
[Filter Settings]
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Filter Settings] > [Filter Effect]
[]:Image effect ON/OFF
[]:Selects an image effect (filter)
[]:Adjusts an image effect
• [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] are not
available in the following cases.
– Creative Video Mode
– When recording motion pictures
• The available ISO sensitivity settings will be limited up to [ISO3200].
• The ISO sensitivity for [High Dynamic] will be fixed to [AUTO].
• When using [Filter Effect], you cannot use menus or recording functions not available in
Creative Control Mode.
For example, White Balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be set to [ ] (forced
flash off).
Not available in these cases:
• In the following case, [Filter Settings] does not work:
– When using [4K Live Cropping]
MENU
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
197
9. Menu Guide
∫ [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
You can press the shutter button once and take two pictures simultaneously, one with an
image effect and the other one without it.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
This sets the method for correcting the color reproduction of the recorded images on the
screens of a PC or on a device such as a printer.
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Filter Settings] >
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
• A picture with an image effect will be taken first, followed by a picture without it.
• Only an image with an image effect is displayed for Auto Review.
Not available in these cases:
• In the following case, [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] does not work:
– Scene Guide Mode
– Recording still pictures while recording a motion picture (when set to [ ] (Video Priority))
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
[Color Space]
> [Rec] > [Color Space]
[sRGB]
Color space is set to sRGB color space.
This is widely used in computer related equipment.
[AdobeRGB]
Color space is set to AdobeRGB color space.
AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as professional
printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB.
• Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.
• The setting is fixed to [sRGB] in the following cases.
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L]
MENU
MENU
9. Menu Guide
198
Applicable modes:
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
Applicable modes:
You can adjust the brightness of bright and dark portions on an image while checking the
brightness on the screen.
1
Press
2
/
1
to select the type of Highlight Shadow.
[Metering Mode]
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Metering Mode]
Brightness measurement
position
Conditions
[]
(Multiple)
Whole screen
Normal usage
(produces balanced pictures)
[]
(Center weighted)
Center and surrounding area Subject in center
[]
(Spot)
Center of [i]
(spot metering target
A
)
Great difference between
brightness of subject and
background
(e.g. person in spotlight on stage,
backlighting)
• If you set the spot metering target on the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by
the brightness around the location.
[Highlight Shadow]
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Highlight Shadow]
(Standard) A state with no adjustments is set.
(Raise the contrast) Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
(Lower the contrast) Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
(Brighten dark areas) Dark areas are brightened.
// (Custom) Registered custom settings can be applied.
MENU
MENU
ヒ
ヤ
ビ
ヤ
ピ
ヤ
199
9. Menu Guide
2
Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of
bright/dark portions.
A Bright portion
B Dark portion
• Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
• To register a preferred setting, press 3, and select the
destination where the custom setting will be registered to
([Custom1] ( )/[Custom2] ( )/[Custom3] ( )).
3
Press [MENU/SET].
Applicable modes:
Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference between the
background and subject is great, etc.
Settings: [AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
• The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen.
• Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with / / / back to the default
setting.
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], the setting is fixed to (Standard).
Not available in these cases:
• [Highlight Shadow] cannot be set in the following cases:
– When using [Filter Settings]
[i.Dynamic]
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [i.Dynamic]
Not available in these cases:
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• [i.Dynamic] does not work in the following cases:
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
• [i.Dynamic] is not available in the following cases:
– When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L]
– When recording with Live View Composite
ヒ
ヤ
ビ
ヤ
ピ
ヤ
MENU
9. Menu Guide
200
Applicable modes:
Pictures with sharp profile and resolution can be taken by using the Intelligent Resolution
Technology.
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to [AUTO] or [ ].
[i.Resolution]
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [i.Resolution]
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
> [Rec] > [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]
[AUTO]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]/
[25600]
Not available in these cases:
• [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is not available when the following functions are being used:
– [Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Handheld Night Shot]
(Scene Guide Mode)
MENU
MENU
201
9. Menu Guide
Applicable modes:
Set the minimum shutter speed when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or [ ].
Settings: [AUTO]/[1/16000] to [1/1]
Applicable modes:
The camera automatically removes noise that appears when the shutter speed becomes
slower to take pictures of night or similar scenery.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Min. Shtr Speed]
> [Rec] > [Min. Shtr Speed]
• The shutter speed may become slower than the set value in situations where proper exposure
cannot be obtained.
[Long Shtr NR]
> [Rec] > [Long Shtr NR]
• [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] is displayed for the same time as the shutter speed for
signal processing.
Not available in these cases:
• [Long Shtr NR] is not available in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using the electronic shutter
MENU
MENU
9. Menu Guide
202
Applicable modes:
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics, you can record
pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery corrected.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
The camera raises the resolution by correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction when
the aperture is closed.
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]
[Shading Comp.]
> [Rec] > [Shading Comp.]
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
Not available in these cases:
• Correction is not possible in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When taking pictures while recording motion pictures (when [ ] (Video Priority) is set)
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])
– When using the Digital Zoom
[Diffraction Compensation]
> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Diffraction Compensation]
• Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
MENU
MENU
203
9. Menu Guide
Applicable modes:
Disables operational sounds and output of light at once.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• Audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF Assist lamp will be disabled.
The following settings are fixed.
– [Flash Mode]: [ ] (forced flash off)
– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]
– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]
– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [E-Shutter Vol]: [ ] (OFF)
Applicable modes:
Select the shutter to be used for taking pictures.
[Silent Mode]
> [Rec] > [Silent Mode]
• Even when [ON] is set, the following lamps light up/flash.
– WIRELESS connection lamp
– Self-timer indicator
• Sounds that are produced by the camera regardless of your operations, such as the lens
aperture sound, cannot be muted.
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject
when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
[Shutter Type]
> [Rec] > [Shutter Type]
[AUTO]
Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition
and shutter speed.
[MSHTR] Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
[EFC] Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
[ESHTR] Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.
MENU
MENU
9. Menu Guide
204
¢1 This setting is available only in Manual Exposure Mode.
¢2 If the ISO sensitivity is higher than [ISO3200], the shutter speed will be faster than 1 second.
¢3 The electronic shutter sound can be set in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone] in [Beep] of
the [Setup] menu.
• Compared to Mechanical Shutter Mode, Electronic Front Curtain Mode produces less
shutter-induced shake, so it can minimize the influence of shutter vibration.
• Electronic Shutter Mode allows you to take pictures without causing shutter vibration.
Applicable modes:
To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the
specified time has passed.
Settings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
Mechanical Shutter
Electronic Front
Curtain
Electronic Shutter
Description
The camera starts and
ends an exposure with
the mechanical shutter.
The camera starts an
exposure electronically,
and ends it with the
mechanical shutter.
The camera starts and
ends an exposure
electronically.
Flash ±±—
Shutter Speed
(Sec.)
B (Bulb)
¢1
/60 to 1/4000 B (Bulb)
¢1
/60 to 1/2000 1
¢2
to 1/16000
Shutter Sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Electronic shutter
sound
¢3
• When [ ] is displayed on the screen, pictures will be taken with the electronic shutter.
• When [ESHTR] is set, if you take a picture of a moving subject, it may appear distorted
in the picture.
• When [ESHTR] is set, horizontal stripes may appear on pictures taken under lighting
such as a fluorescent or LED lighting fixture. The horizontal stripes may be reduced if
you set a slower shutter speed.
[Shutter Delay]
> [Rec] > [Shutter Delay]
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
MENU
205
9. Menu Guide
Applicable modes:
You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of exposure into a single picture with rich
gradation.
You can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example,
the contrast between the background and the subject is large.
An image combined by HDR is recorded in JPEG.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]
∫ Changing settings
[HDR]
> [Rec] > [HDR]
[Dynamic Range]
[AUTO]: Automatically adjusts the exposure range according to the
differences between the bright and dark areas.
[n1EV]/[n2EV]/[n3EV]:
Adjusts the exposure within the selected exposure
parameters.
[Auto Align]
[ON]: Automatically corrects camera shake (jitter) and other
problems that can cause the images to misalign.
Recommended for use during hand-held shooting.
[OFF]: Image misalignment not adjusted.
Recommended when a tripod is used.
• Do not move the unit during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete.
• A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs.
• The angle of view becomes narrow slightly when [Auto Align] is set to [ON].
• Flash is fixed to [ ] (forced flash off).
Not available in these cases:
• [HDR] does not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture recording.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
MENU
9. Menu Guide
206
Applicable modes:
Gives an effect like multi exposure. (up to 4 times equivalent per a single image)
1
Press
3
/
4
to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].
2
Decide on the composition, and take the first
picture.
• After taking the picture, press the shutter button halfway
down to take the next picture.
• Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET]
for one of the following operations.
3
Shooting the second, third, and fourth exposures.
• To save the recorded pictures and finish Multiple Exposure, press [Fn2] when taking
pictures.
4
Press
4
to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to finish.
∫ Changing settings
[Multi Exp.]
> [Rec] > [Multi Exp.]
– [Next]: Advance to the next picture.
– [Retake]: Return to the first picture.
– [Exit]: Record the image of the first picture, and
finish the multiple exposure picture-taking
session.
[Auto Gain]
If you select [OFF], all exposure results are superimposed as they are.
Compensate the exposure as necessary.
[Overlay]
If you select [ON], you can apply Multi Exposure to previously recorded
images. After [Start] is selected, images on the card will be displayed.
Select a RAW image, and press [MENU/SET] to proceed to recording.
• The recording information displayed for pictures taken with multiple exposures is the
recording information for the last picture taken.
• You can perform [Overlay] only for RAW images recorded with the camera.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
– When recording with Live View Composite
MENU
([LW
5HWDNH
1H[W
([LW
5HWDNH
207
9. Menu Guide
[Motion Picture] menu
¢ Menu items common to the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu. Setting changes will be
applied to the settings of both menus.
Applicable modes:
Select the luminance range to match the use of motion picture.
Settings: [0-255]/[16-255]
Applicable modes:
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the motion picture.
Settings: [1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]/[OFF]
• [Rec Quality] (P165)
• [Snap Movie] (P170)
• [AFS/AFF] (P88)
¢
• [Continuous AF] (P167)
• [AF Custom Setting(Video)] (P168)
• [Photo Style] (P194)
¢
• [Filter Settings] (P196)
¢
• [Luminance Level] (P207)
• [Metering Mode] (P198)
¢
• [Highlight Shadow] (P198)
¢
•[i.Dynamic] (P199)
¢
• [i.Resolution] (P200)
¢
• [ISO Sensitivity (video)] (P175)
• [Diffraction Compensation] (P202)
¢
• [Stabilizer] (P141)
¢
• [Flkr Decrease] (P207)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P147)
• [Digital Zoom] (P149)
¢
• [Picture Mode in Rec.] (P169)
• [Sound Rec Level Disp.] (P173)
• [Sound Rec Level Adj.] (P173)
• [Sound Rec Level Limiter] (P173)
• [Wind Noise Canceller] (P208)/
[Wind Cut] (P289)
• [Lens Noise Cut] (P208)
• [Special Mic.] (P288)
• [Sound Output] (P209)
[Luminance Level]
> [Motion Picture] > [Luminance Level]
• The setting is fixed at [0-255] in the following cases:
– When taking pictures (including picture-taking during motion picture recording)
– When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L]
[Flkr Decrease]
> [Motion Picture] > [Flkr Decrease]
MENU
MENU
9. Menu Guide
208
Applicable modes:
This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining
sound quality.
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
This can reduce the power zoom operational sound produced during motion picture
recording.
• This function works only when an interchangeable lens that supports power zoom is used.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Wind Noise Canceller]
> [Motion Picture] > [Wind Noise Canceller]
• [HIGH] effectively reduces the wind noise by minimizing the low-pitched sound when a strong
wind is detected.
• [STANDARD] extracts and reduces only the wind noise without deteriorating the sound
quality.
• You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
• This function works only with the built-in microphone.
When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed.
[Lens Noise Cut]
> [Motion Picture] > [Lens Noise Cut]
• When this function is used, the sound quality may differ from that during normal operation.
MENU
MENU
209
9. Menu Guide
Applicable modes:
You can record motion pictures while hearing the sounds that are being recorded by
connecting a commercially available headphones to this unit.
A Headphone socket
B Commercially available headphone
• Use a headphone cable with the length less than 3 m (9.8 feet).
• When headphones are connected, electronic sounds and electronic shutter sounds are muted.
∫ Switch the sound output method
• [Sound Output] is fixed to [REC SOUND] in the following cases:
– When in Recording Mode
– During HDMI output
– When using an external microphone
∫ Adjusting the headphone volume
1
Select the menu.
2
Connect headphones, and rotate the control dial while the recording screen is
displayed or a motion picture is being played back.
• You can also adjust the volume by touching [ ] or [ ] during playback.
To adjust the volume using the menu:
[Sound Output]
> [Motion Picture] > [Sound Output]
[REALTIME]
Actual sound without time lag.
It may be different to the audio recorded in the motion picture.
[REC SOUND]
Sound that is being recorded in motion pictures.
The audio may be output slower than the actual audio.
>
[Custom] > [Operation] > [Dial Set.] > [Control Dial
Assignment] > []
: Reduce volume level : Increase volume level
> [Setup] > [Headphone Volume]
MENU
MENU
MENU
9. Menu Guide
210
[Custom] menu
[Exposure]
• [ISO Increments] (P211)
• [Extended ISO] (P107)
• [Exposure Comp. Reset] (P211)
[Focus / Release Shutter]
• [AF/AE Lock] (P103)
• [AF/AE Lock Hold] (P211)
• [Shutter AF] (P211)
• [Half Press Release] (P211)
•[Quick AF] (P211)
• [Eye Sensor AF] (P212)
• [Pinpoint AF Setting] (P212)
• [AF Assist Lamp] (P212)
• [Direct Focus Area] (P213)
• [Focus/Release Priority] (P213)
• [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] (P213)
• [Loop Movement Focus Frame] (P213)
• [AF Area Display] (P214)
•[AF+MF] (P214)
• [MF Assist] (P214)
• [MF Assist Display] (P215)
[Operation]
• [Fn Button Set] (P56)
• [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] (P215)
• [ISO Displayed Setting] (P41)
• [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (P42)
• [Q.MENU] (P215)
• [Dial Set.] (P43)
• [Operation Lock Setting] (P215)
• [Focus Ring Lock] (P215)
• [Video Button] (P215)
• [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] (P287)
• [Touch Settings] (P216)
[Monitor / Display]
• [Auto Review] (P216)
• [Monochrome Live View] (P216)
• [Constant Preview] (P217)
• [Live View Boost] (P217)
• [Peaking] (P217)
• [Histogram] (P218)
• [Guide Line] (P218)
• [Center Marker] (P218)
• [Highlight] (P219)
• [Zebra Pattern] (P219)
• [Expo.Meter] (P220)
• [MF Guide] (P220)
• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] (P220)
• [Monitor Info. Disp.] (P220)
• [Rec Area] (P221)
• [Remaining Disp.] (P221)
• [Red REC Frame Indicator] (P221)
• [Menu Guide] (P221)
[Lens / Others]
• [Lens Position Resume] (P221)
• [Power Zoom Lens] (P150)
• [Lens Fn Button Setting] (P222)
• [Aperture Ring Increment] (P222)
• [Vertical Position Info (Video)] (P222)
•[Face Recog.] (P223)
• [Profile Setup] (P225)
211
9. Menu Guide
This changes the increments used to set the ISO sensitivity.
Settings: [1/3 EV]/[1 EV]
An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is
turned off.
When [ON] is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release
[AF/AE LOCK].
To clear the lock, press [AF/AE LOCK] again.
Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
The camera automatically adjusts the focus when the amount of camera blur becomes
small.
This will speed up the focusing that takes place when you press the shutter button.
> [Custom] > [Exposure]
[ISO Increments]
[Exposure Comp. Reset]
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter]
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
[Shutter AF]
[Half Press Release]
[Quick AF]
• The battery will be consumed faster than usual.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In Preview Mode
– In low light situations
MENU
MENU
9. Menu Guide
212
The camera automatically adjusts the focus when the eye sensor is active.
This changes the setting for an enlarged display that appears when the Auto Focus Mode
is set to [ ].
This lights the AF Assist Lamp for easier focusing when you press the shutter button
halfway while recording in a dark location.
[Eye Sensor AF]
• [Eye Sensor AF] may not work in dimly lit conditions.
[Pinpoint AF Setting]
[Pinpoint AF Time]
Sets the time for which the enlarged screen is displayed when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
Settings: [LONG]/[MID]/[SHORT]
[Pinpoint AF Display]
Sets the display mode of the enlarged screen (windowed screen/full
screen).
Settings: [FULL] (full screen)/[PIP] (windowed screen)
[AF Assist Lamp]
• The effective range of the AF Assist Lamp is different depending on the lens used.
– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is attached and at Wide:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is attached and at Wide:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
• Remove the lens hood.
• The AF Assist Lamp gets slightly blocked when the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060/
H-FSA14140) is used, but it does not affect the performance.
• The AF Assist Lamp may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus when a lens
with large diameter is used.
• [AF Assist Lamp] is fixed to [OFF] in the following case:
– [Distinct Scenery]/[Bright Blue Sky]/[Romantic Sunset Glow]/[Vivid Sunset Glow]/[Glistening
Water]/[Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic
Nightscape]/[Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
213
9. Menu Guide
This moves the AF area or MF Assist using the cursor button when recording.
Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during AF.
• Different settings can be applied to different Focus Mode settings ([AFS/AFF], [AFC]).
Focus positions are stored separately for the camera's horizontal and vertical orientations.
When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the
position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.
[Direct Focus Area]
• You can move the positions below with the cursor button.
– When [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] is selected: AF area
– When [ ] is selected: lock-on position
– When [ ] is selected: enlarged area
• Use the Quick Menu (P54) or Fn buttons (P56) to use the functions assigned to the cursor
button, such as AF Mode selection.
• [Direct Focus Area] is fixed to [OFF] in the following case:
– [Glistening Water] (Scene Guide Mode)
– Creative Control Mode
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
[Focus/Release Priority]
[FOCUS] Disables recording when focus is not achieved.
[BALANCE]
Performs recording while controlling the balance between focusing and
shutter release timing.
[RELEASE] Enables recording even when focus is not achieved.
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
[ON]
Memorizes separate positions for horizontal
and vertical orientations (two vertical
orientations, left and right, are available).
• The following last-specified positions will be
memorized.
– The last AF area position (when [ ], [ ] or [ ] is used)
– The last MF Assist display position
[OFF] Sets the same setting for both horizontal and vertical orientations.
[Loop Movement Focus Frame]
9. Menu Guide
214
This changes the AF area display setting for when the Auto Focus Mode is set to [ ]
([49-Area]) or [ ], etc. ([Custom Multi]).
You can fine-adjust the focus manually during AF lock (when the following conditions are
met).
– When the Focus Mode is set to [AFS] and the shutter button is pressed halfway
– When [AF/AE LOCK] is pressed
Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
• Available settings vary depending on the lens used.
When an interchangeable lens having a focus ring (H-FS12060/H-FSA14140) is used
When an interchangeable lens with no focus ring is used
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[AF Area Display]
[ON]
Displays AF areas on the recording screen.
• AF areas are not displayed when the default AF area setting is applied to
[ ] ([49-Area]) or [ ], [ ] or [ ] in [Custom Multi].
[OFF]
Displays AF areas on the recording screen for just a few seconds after you
start using them.
• Even when [ON] is set, the same operation as [OFF] is performed in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 4K photos
– Creative Video Mode
[AF+MF]
[MF Assist]
[]The screen is enlarged by operating the lens or by pressing [ ] (2).
[]The screen is enlarged by operating the lens.
[] The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ] (2).
[OFF] The screen is not enlarged.
Not available in these cases:
• MF Assist is not displayed in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording with [4K Pre-Burst]
– When using the Digital Zoom
ヤヒ ヤビ
ヤピ
215
9. Menu Guide
Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
Settings: [FULL] (full screen)/[PIP] (windowed screen)
This sets the operation to be performed when [ ] (White Balance), [ ] (ISO
sensitivity) or [ ] (Exposure Compensation) is pressed.
If you select [CUSTOM], you can customize the Quick Menu settings. (P55)
This sets which control functions will be disabled when [Operation Lock] is set in [Fn
Button Set] (P56) of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
This disables the focus ring operation of the interchangeable lens during MF to lock the
focus.
• [MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the focus ring is locked.
Enables/disables the motion picture button.
[MF Assist Display]
> [Custom] > [Operation]
[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]
[WHILE
PRESSING]
Allows you to change the setting while pressing and holding the button.
Release the button to confirm the settings value, and to return to the
recording screen.
[AFTER
PRESSING]
Press the button to change settings. Press the button again to confirm the
settings value, and to return to the recording screen.
[Q.MENU]
[Operation Lock Setting]
[Cursor] Disables the functions of the cursor button and the [MENU/SET] button.
[Touch Screen] Disables the touch functions of the touch panel.
[Dial] Disables the functions of the control dial.
[Focus Ring Lock]
[Video Button]
MENU
9. Menu Guide
216
Enables/disables the Touch operation.
Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.
You can display the recording screen in black and white.
This is convenient for focusing with MF.
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen] All touch operations.
[Touch Tab]
Operations of tabs, such as [ ] on the right side of the screen.
[Touch AF]
[AF]: Operation to optimize focus for a touched subject. (P95)
[AF+AE]:Operation to optimize focus and brightness. (P99)
[Touch Pad AF]
Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the
viewfinder is in use. (P98)
> [Custom] > [Monitor / Display]
[Auto Review]
[Duration Time
(photo)]
Sets the display time of the recorded images after picture-taking.
[Duration Time
(4K PHOTO)]
Sets whether to display/hide the recorded images after 4K photo
recording.
[Duration Time
(Post Focus)]
Sets whether to display/hide the recorded images after recording with the
Post Focus function.
[Playback
Operation
Priority]
Allows you to change or delete the playback image during Auto Review.
• When [Duration Time (photo)] is set to [HOLD], the images are displayed until the shutter
button is pressed halfway. [Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].
• When [Grain Effect] is selected for [Photo Style], [Auto Review] is not displayed during [Time
Lapse Shot] and [Stop Motion Animation] recording.
[Monochrome Live View]
• Even if you use the HDMI output during recording, this function will not work for the connected
device.
• Recorded images will not be affected.
MENU
217
9. Menu Guide
You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording
screen in Manual Exposure Mode.
Preview also operates in the MF Assist screen when [Preview While MF Assist] is set to
[ON] in [SET].
Displays the screen brighter to make it easier to check subjects and compositions even in
low-light environment.
• You can change the Recording Mode in which [Live View Boost] works by using [SET].
In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is
being adjusted manually.
• When [Detect Level] in [SET] is set to [HIGH], portions to be highlighted are reduced, allowing
you to achieve a more precise focus.
• Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the [Display Color] setting as follows.
[Constant Preview]
• This function does not work when using the flash.
[Live View Boost]
[MODE1] Setting for low brightness, with priority given to a soft display.
[MODE2] Setting for high brightness, with priority given to image visibility.
• This mode does not affect recorded images.
• Noise may be more noticeable in the screen than in the recorded image.
Not available in these cases:
• [Live View Boost] does not work in the following cases:
– When adjusting the exposure (when the shutter button is pressed halfway, for example)
– When recording a motion picture or 4K photo
– When using [Filter Settings]
– When using [Constant Preview]
[Peaking]
[Detect Level] [HIGH] [LOW]
[Display Color]
[ ] (Light blue) [ ] (Blue)
[] (Yellow) [] (Orange)
[ ] (Yellow-green) [ ] (Green)
[] (Pink) [] (Red)
[ ] (White) [ ] (Gray)
9. Menu Guide
218
Display the histogram.
You can set the position by pressing
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
.
• Direct touch operation is also possible from the recording screen.
• A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black
to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.
It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.
A dark
B bright
This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.
When [ ] is set, guideline positions can be set by pressing
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
.
• You can also set the position directly by touching [ ] on the guideline of the recording screen.
The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].
• Each time [ ] in [ ] is touched, the setting is switched in order of [ ] ([Detect Level]:
[LOW])
>
[ ] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH])
>
[OFF].
Not available in these cases:
• [Peaking] is not available for [Rough Monochrome] of Creative Video Mode.
• When [Live View Boost] is being used, [Peaking] is not available.
[Histogram]
• When the recorded picture and the histogram do not match each other under the
following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange.
– During Exposure Compensation
– When the flash is activated
– When the correct exposure is not achieved, such as when the lighting is low.
• The histogram is an approximation in the Recording Mode.
[Guide Line]
[Center Marker]
219
9. Menu Guide
When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back,
white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.
Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern.
Select [SET] to set the brightness to be processed as a zebra pattern.
• You can select a brightness value between [50%] and [105%]. In [Zebra 2], you can select
[OFF]. If you select [100%] or [105%], only the areas that are already white saturated are
displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be
processed as a zebra pattern will be.
[Highlight]
• If there are any white saturated areas, we recommend compensating the exposure towards
negative referring to the histogram and then taking the picture again.
• This does not affect the recorded images.
Not available in these cases:
• The highlight display does not work in the following cases:
– During 4K photo playback
– During playback of images recorded with the Post Focus function
– When thumbnails are displayed
– During Calendar Playback
– When the display is enlarged
[Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1] [ZEBRA2]
• If there are any white saturated areas, we recommend compensating the exposure towards
negative referring to the histogram and then taking the picture.
• Displayed zebra patterns will not be recorded.
• If you assign [Zebra Pattern] to [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, each time
you press the Fn button to which the setting is assigned, the zebra pattern toggles as follows:
[Zebra 1]
>
[Zebra 2]
>
[OFF].
If you set [Zebra 2] to [OFF], the pattern toggles in the order of [Zebra 1]
>
[OFF]
9. Menu Guide
220
Display the exposure meter.
When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows
you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.
A Indicator for ¶ (infinity)
You can switch the viewfinder/monitor display method.
You can set whether the screen flips or not depending on the facing or angle of the monitor
during recording.
Display the recording information screen. (P45, 293)
[Expo.Meter]
• Set to [ON] to display the Exposure meter when performing
Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
• Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
• When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display
information for screen by pressing [DISP.].
• If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
[MF Guide]
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]
[LVF Disp. Set]
(viewfinder style):
Scales down images slightly so that you can better review
the composition of the images.
[Monitor Disp. Set]
(monitor style):
Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see
their details.
[Horizontal Image
Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips horizontally
according to the angle to which the monitor is opened or
closed.
[ON]: The screen is flipped horizontally all the time.
[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips vertically according
to the angle to which the monitor is rotated.
[ON]: The screen is flipped vertically all the time.
[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
• The settings for this function are not reflected in the playback screen.
[Monitor Info. Disp.]
2
00
0
60
60
F
4.0
F
4.0
98
98
98
SS
SS
SS
F
F
250 125 60 30 15
4.0 5.6 8.0
221
9. Menu Guide
This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording.
This will switch display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording
time.
A red frame is displayed on the recording screen that indicates that video is being
recorded.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
This displays a selection screen when you set the mode dial to [ ] or [ ].
Saves the focus position when you turn off the camera. When an interchangeable lens that
is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.
[Rec Area]
Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture
recording.
Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for motion picture
recording.
• The recording area indicated is an approximation.
• When recording with the 4K Photo function or Post Focus function, [Rec Area] is fixed to [ ].
[Remaining Disp.]
Displays the number of recordable pictures.
Displays the available recording time for motion pictures.
[Red REC Frame Indicator]
[Menu Guide]
> [Custom] > [Lens / Others]
[Lens Position Resume]
MENU
9. Menu Guide
222
When an interchangeable lens with a focus selector switch and a focus button is being
used, this sets the function to be assigned to the focus button of that lens.
• You can call up the set function by setting the focus selector switch of the lens to [Fn] and then
pressing the focus button of the lens.
The aperture value setting increments for operating the aperture ring can be changed.
• This can be used when using interchangeable lenses that support clickless aperture rings
(H-X1025/H-X2550: optional). (As of January 2025)
• This works when the interchangeable lens aperture ring position is set to other than [A] during
recording of picture.
You can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information during
video recording.
[Lens Fn Button Setting]
Settings: [Focus Stop]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF-ON]/[Stabilizer]/[Focus Area Set]/
[AF Mode/MF]/[Preview]/[Focus Ring Lock]/[Off]/[Restore to Default]
• When [Focus Stop] is used, the focus is locked while the focus button is pressed and held.
[Aperture Ring Increment]
[SMOOTH] Allows fine setting of aperture values.
[1/3EV] Allows setting of aperture values in 1/3 EV increments.
• If the aperture ring position is set to [A], then this enables the camera aperture value, and is
the same setting as with [1/3EV].
• When recording motion pictures, this uses the same fine setting as with [SMOOTH].
• When set to [SMOOTH], fractions of aperture values are not displayed on the screen.
[Vertical Position Info (Video)]
[ON]
Records vertical orientation information. Videos recorded with the
camera held vertically will be automatically played back vertically on the
PC, smartphone, etc. during playback.
[OFF] Does not record vertical orientation information.
• On the playback screen of the camera, only the thumbnail display is played in vertical
orientation.
223
9. Menu Guide
Face Recognition is a function which finds a face resembling a registered face and
priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back
or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.
[Face Recog.]
[ON] Enables the Face Recognition function.
[OFF] Disables the Face Recognition function.
[MEMORY]
Allows you to register face images, or edit or delete registered information.
Face Settings
You can register information such as names and birthdays for face images of up to
6 people.
1 Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the Face Recognition
frame that is not registered, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Take the picture adjusting the face with the guide.
• The faces of subjects other than people (pets, etc.)
cannot be registered.
• To display the description of the face registration,
press 1 or touch [ ].
3 Set the item.
• You can register up to 3 face images.
[Name]
It is possible to register names.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P60.
[Age] It is possible to register the birthday.
[Add
Images]
(Add
Images)
To add additional face images.
• Select a blank face image frame to register a new
image.
(Delete)
To delete one of the face images.
• Select the face image you want to delete.
Change or delete the information for a registered person
1 Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the face image to edit or delete and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Set the item.
[Info Edit]
Changing the information of an already registered person.
• Perform step
3
in “Face Settings”.
[Priority]
The focus and exposure are preferentially adjusted for
higher-priority faces.
• Rearrange and set the face priority.
[Delete] Deleting information of a registered person.
KEN
1HZ
9. Menu Guide
224
• The following functions will also work with the Face Recognition function.
In Recording Mode
– Display of corresponding name when camera detects a registered face
¢
In Playback Mode
– Display of name and age
¢ Names of up to 3 people are displayed.
Precedence for the names displayed when taking pictures is determined according to the
order of registration.
Point of recording when registering the face images
• Face front with eyes open and mouth closed, making
sure the outline of the face, the eyes, or the eyebrows
are not covered with hair when registering.
• Make sure there is no extreme shading on the face when
registering.
(Flash will not flash during registration.)
(Good example for registering)
When face is not recognized during recording
• Register the face of same person indoors and outdoors, or with different expressions or
angles.
• Additionally register at the location of recording.
• When a person who is registered is not recognized, correct by re-registering.
• Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognize faces correctly even for
registered faces, depending on the facial expression and environment.
• [Face Recog.] only works when the AF Mode is set to [ ].
• During the Burst Mode, [Face Recog.] picture information can be attached to only the first
picture.
• When group pictures are played back, the name of the first picture of the set is displayed.
Not available in these cases:
• [Face Recog.] does not work in the following cases.
– When recording motion pictures
• [Face Recog.] cannot be set in the following cases:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
225
9. Menu Guide
If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name
and age in months and years in the images.
You can display these at playback or stamp the recorded images using [Text Stamp].
Settings: [ ] ([Baby1])/[ ] ([Baby2])/[ ] ([Pet])/[OFF]/[SET]
∫ Setting [Age] or [Name]
1
Press
3
/
4
to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
2
Press
3
/
4
to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and then press [MENU/SET].
3
Press
3
/
4
to select [Age] or [Name] and then press
[MENU/SET].
4
Press
3
/
4
to select [SET] and then press [MENU/
SET].
∫ To cancel the display of [Age] and [Name]
Select [OFF] in [Profile Setup].
[Profile Setup]
Enter [Age] (birthday).
Enter [Name].
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P60.
Not available in these cases:
• [Profile Setup] is not available in the following cases:
– In Creative Video Mode
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
• Ages and names are not recorded in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– Still pictures recorded during motion picture recording ([ ] (Video Priority))
9. Menu Guide
226
[Setup] menu
¢ Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not displayed
due to differences in specifications.
Sets the times for the region where you live and your holiday destination.
• [Destination] can be set after setting up [Home].
After selecting [Destination] or [Home], press
2
/
1
to select an area, and press
[MENU/SET] to set.
[Destination]:
Travel destination area
A Current time of the destination area
B Time difference from home area
[Home]:
Your home area
C Current time
D Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
• [Cust.Set Mem.] (P76)
• [Clock Set] (P35)
•[World Time] (P226)
• [Travel Date] (P227)
•[Wi-Fi
®
] (P228)
• [Bluetooth
®
] (P228)
• [Wireless Connection Lamp] (P228)
• [Beep] (P228)
• [Headphone Volume] (P209)
• [Power Save Mode] (P229)
• [Monitor Display Speed] (P230)
• [Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder] (P230)
• [Monitor Luminance] (P230)
• [Eye Sensor] (P231)
• [Battery Use Priority] (P286)
• [USB Mode] (P231)
• [USB Power Supply] (P231)
• [TV Connection] (P232)
• [Language] (P232)
• [Version Disp.] (P233)
• [Folder / File Settings] (P233)
• [No.Reset] (P234)
•[Reset] (P234)
• [Reset Network Settings] (P235)
• [Pixel Refresh] (P235)
• [Sensor Cleaning] (P235)
• [Level Gauge Adjust.] (P235)
• [Demo Mode] (P235)
• [Approved Regulations] (P235)
¢
• [Format] (P30)
> [Setup]
[World Time]
MENU
227
9. Menu Guide
• If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
• Set to [Home] when you have returned from your travel destination.
• If you cannot find the travel destination in the areas displayed on the screen, set by the time
difference from the home area.
[Travel Date]
[Travel Setup]
If you set your travel schedule and record images, elapsed days (how
many days after) of the travel will be recorded.
[Location]
When [Travel Setup] is set, you can set your travel destination.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P60.
• You can display the elapsed days and travel destination during playback or stamp them on
recorded pictures in [Text Stamp].
• The travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the departure date you set.
If you set [World Time] to the travel destination, the travel date is calculated using the date in
the clock setting and the travel destination setting.
• When [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], the number of days elapsed is not recorded. It is not
displayed even if [Travel Setup] is set to [SET] after recording.
• When the current date passes the return date, [Travel Setup] is automatically canceled.
• [Location] cannot be recorded in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
9. Menu Guide
228
∫ [Wi-Fi Function] (P254)
∫ [Wi-Fi Setup] (P276)
∫ [Bluetooth] (P256)
∫ [Send Image (Smartphone)] (P269)
∫ [Remote Wakeup] (P268)
∫ [Returning from Sleep Mode] (P264)
∫ [Auto Transfer] (P266)
∫ [Location Logging] (P267)
∫ [Auto Clock Set] (P268)
This enables/disables the WIRELESS connection lamp.
If you select [OFF], they will not light/flash.
This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound.
Settings: [Beep Volume]/[E-Shutter Vol]/[E-Shutter Tone]
[Wi-Fi
®
]
[Bluetooth
®
]
[Wireless Connection Lamp]
[Beep]
Not available in these cases:
• [Beep] is not available when [Silent Mode] is set to [ON].
229
9. Menu Guide
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save) status or turn off
the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a set time. Reduces battery
consumption.
[Power Save Mode]
[Sleep Mode]
Sets the amount of time until the camera is put into sleep.
• The power consumption of the camera may increase when set to [OFF].
[Sleep
Mode(Wi-Fi)]
Sets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being disconnected from Wi-Fi.
• The power consumption of the camera may increase when set to [OFF].
[Auto LVF/
Monitor Off]
Sets the amount of time it takes for the viewfinder/monitor to turn off.
(The camera is not turned off.)
[Power Save LVF
Shooting]
Puts the camera into sleep when the recording screen is displayed using
automatic viewfinder/monitor switching.
• [Power Save LVF Shooting] does not operate when [Time] is set to [OFF].
[Time] Sets the amount of time until the camera is put into sleep.
[Display]
Sets the screen where the camera is put to sleep.
[Only Monitor Info.]:
Puts the camera into sleep only when the on-monitor recording
information screen is displayed. (P45)
[All Live View]:
Puts the camera into sleep from any screen during recording
standby.
• To recover from [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], or [Power Save LVF Shooting], perform
one of the following operations:
– Press the shutter button halfway.
– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and then [ON] again.
• To recover from [Auto LVF/Monitor Off], press one of the buttons.
Not available in these cases:
• [Power Save Mode] does not work in the following cases.
– When connecting to a PC
– When recording or playing back motion pictures
– During a slide show
– When recording with [4K Pre-Burst]
– When recording in [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When recording with Live View Composite
– When using the HDMI output during recording
9. Menu Guide
230
This sets the monitor frame rate.
Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the monitor/viewfinder is adjusted.
1
Select the settings by pressing
3
/
4
, and adjust with
2
/
1
.
2
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
[Monitor Display Speed]
[30fps] Reduces the power consumption, extending the operating time.
[60fps] Displays movements smoother.
• The settings of [Monitor Display Speed] do not affect the recorded images.
• The setting for the viewfinder is fixed at [60fps].
[Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder]
• It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is
in use.
• Some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the monitor. However, this does not
affect the recorded pictures.
[Monitor Luminance]
(Auto)
The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is
around the camera.
(Mode1) Make the monitor brighter.
(Mode2) Set the monitor to the standard brightness.
(Mode3) Make the monitor darker.
• Some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the monitor. However, this does not
affect the recorded pictures.
• When [ ] or [ ] is set, the usage time is reduced.
231
9. Menu Guide
Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.
Provides power from the USB connection cable.
[Eye Sensor]
[Sensitivity] This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.
[LVF/Monitor
Switch]
This will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.
[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic switching between the monitor and
viewfinder)
[LVF] (viewfinder)
[MON] (monitor)
• If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor Switch] setting will
also switch.
[USB Mode]
[Select on
connection]
Select this setting to select the USB communication system when
connecting to another device.
[PC(Storage)] Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
[PC(Webcam)]
Select this setting when using this camera as a web camera.
• You need to install “LUMIX Webcam Software (Beta)” on your PC.
Refer to the support website below for details:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/
lumix_webcam.html
(English only)
[USB Power Supply]
• Even if this item is set to [OFF], power will be supplied when the AC adaptor is connected.
9. Menu Guide
232
[HDMI Mode (Play)]:
This sets the video format to be used for output in Playback Mode when the camera and a TV or
monitor is connected with an HDMI micro cable.
• With camera models DC-G97P/DC-G97PP:
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
[HDMI Info Display (Rec)]:
Select whether or not to output the information display of the camera to an external device
connected via HDMI. (P279)
[VIERA Link]:
If you select [ON], operations of the camera and the VIERA Link compatible equipment
connected to the camera with an HDMI micro cable are automatically linked, enabling you to
control the camera with the remote control of the VIERA Link compatible equipment.
Set the language displayed on the screen.
[TV Connection]
[AUTO]
Outputs images at an output resolution suited to the
connected TV.
[4K/30p]/[1080p]/[1080i]/[720p]/
[480p]
Outputs images at the selected resolution.
[AUTO]
Outputs images at an output resolution suited to the
connected TV.
[4K/25p]/[1080p]/[1080i]/[720p]/
[576p]
Outputs images at the selected resolution.
• Even when [4K/25p] is set, MP4 motion pictures
recorded with [4K/100M/30p] will be output at a
resolution of [4K/30p].
• Even when [576p] is set, depending on the connected
TV, images will be output at a resolution of [480p].
• If no image appears on your TV when [AUTO] is set, switch to a setting other than [AUTO] that
can display images on the TV. (Please read the operating instructions for the TV.)
[Language]
• If you set a different language by mistake, select [ ] from the menu icons to set the desired
language.
233
9. Menu Guide
This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked.
Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.
[Version Disp.]
• To display information about the software on the unit, press [MENU/SET] on the version
display screen.
[Folder / File Settings]
Folder name File name
1
Folder number (3-digits, 100–999)
1
Color space ([P]: sRGB, [ _ ]: AdobeRGB)
2
5-digit user-defined segment
2
3-digit user-defined segment
3
File number (4-digits, 0001–9999)
4
File extension
[Select Folder]
Specifies the folder to which images are to be saved.
• The folder name is indicated with the number of files that can be stored.
[Create a New
Folder]
[OK]
Creates a new folder with the same 5-digit user-defined
segment as the current folder name setting.
[Change]
Allows you to redefine the 5-digit user-defined segment
before creating a new folder.
• Available characters: alphabet (upper case characters),
numbers, and [ _ ]
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P60.
• A new folder with an incremented folder number is created.
• If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for resetting the
folder number is displayed.
[File Name
Setting]
[Folder
Number Link]
Uses the folder number of the folder name as the file
name’s 3-digit user-defined segment.
[User Setting]
Allows you to define and set the 3-digit user-defined
segment of the file name.
• Available characters: alphabet (upper case characters),
numbers, and [ _ ]
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P60.
100ABCDE
PABC0001.JPG
9. Menu Guide
234
Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.
The following settings are reset to the default:
– Recording settings
– Network settings ([Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] settings)
– Custom settings ([Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)
– Setup/custom settings (except for [Wi-Fi Setup], [Bluetooth], [Face Recog.] and [Profile
Setup])
• Each folder can store up to 1000 files.
• File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of recording. If you
change the storage folder, a continuing number from the last file number will be assigned.
• In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will be created
automatically when the next file is saved:
– The current folder contains 1000 files
– The current folder contains a file with the file number “9999”
• New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100 all the way up to
999. In this case, we recommend saving their data to a computer or similar device and
formatting the card.
[No.Reset]
• When recording is performed after resetting this item, the folder number is updated and the
file number starts from 0001.
• A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.
The folder number should be reset before it reaches 999. We recommend formatting the card
after saving the data on a PC or elsewhere.
• To reset the folder number to 100:
1 Perform [Format] to format the card.
2 Perform [No.Reset] to reset the file number.
3 Select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.
[Reset]
• When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also reset.
– The [World Time] setting
– The settings of [Travel Date] (departure date, return date, location)
– The settings of [Rotate Disp.], [Picture Sort] and [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback]
menu
• Folder numbers and clock settings are not reset.
• When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera, refer to “About the personal
information” on P311.
235
9. Menu Guide
The following network settings are reset to the default:
–[Wi-Fi Setup]
– Registered device information in [Bluetooth]
It will perform optimization of imaging device and image processing.
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging
device is performed.
You can try Post Focus operations, such as focusing and Peaking, with the image picture.
Displays the certification number for radio regulations.
• Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not displayed due
to differences in specifications.
[Reset Network Settings]
• When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera, refer to “About the personal
information” on P311.
[Pixel Refresh]
• Imaging device and image processing is optimized when the camera is purchased. Use this
function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get recorded.
• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.
[Sensor Cleaning]
• Use this function if the dust is particularly noticeable.
• Turn the camera off and on when finished.
[Level Gauge Adjust.]
[Adjust.]
Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press [MENU/SET]. The
level gauge will be adjusted.
[Level Gauge
Value Reset]
Restores the default level gauge setting.
[Demo Mode]
[Approved Regulations]
9. Menu Guide
236
[My Menu] menu
Register frequently-used menus and display them in [My Menu]. You can register up to
23 menus.
[My Menu Setting]
> [My Menu] > [My Menu Setting]
[Add] Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
[Sorting]
Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to
move and set the destination.
[Delete]
Deletes registered menus.
[Delete Item]: Deletes selected menus.
[Delete All]: Deletes all of the menus.
[Display from
My Menu]
Sets the first menu to be displayed when the menu screen is displayed.
[ON]: Displays My Menu.
[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.
MENU
237
9. Menu Guide
[Playback] menu
∫ How to select an image(s) after selecting [Single] or [Multi]
• When [Single] and [Multi] are not available, select an image in the same way as when [Single]
is selected.
• [Slide Show] (P238)
• [Playback Mode] (P239)
• [Protect] (P240)
• [Rating] (P240)
• [Title Edit] (P241)
• [Face Rec Edit] (P241)
• [RAW Processing] (P242)
• [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] (P121)
• [Light Composition] (P245)
• [Sequence Composition] (P246)
• [Clear Retouch] (P247)
•[Text Stamp] (P248)
•[Resize] (P249)
• [Cropping] (P250)
• [Rotate] (P251)
• [Video Divide] (P251)
• [Time Lapse Video] (P252)
• [Stop Motion Video] (P252)
• [Rotate Disp.] (P252)
•[Picture Sort] (P253)
• [Delete Confirmation] (P253)
• [Delete All Images] (P253)
• The camera may not play back images recorded on other devices correctly, and the functions
of the camera may not be available for the images.
[Single] setting
1
Press
2
/
1
to select the picture.
2
Press [MENU/SET].
• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the
screen, the setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is
pressed again.
[Multi] setting
When a screen similar to the one on the right is displayed:
1
Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the picture and then press
[MENU/SET] (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed
again.
2
Press [DISP.] to execute.
When a screen similar to the one on the right is displayed:
Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the picture, and then press
[MENU/SET] to set (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.
6HW
OK
ュリヴヱハ
Set/Cancel
9. Menu Guide
238
You can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronization with music, and you can
do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.
You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion
pictures, etc.
We recommend this feature when you view your pictures by connecting the camera to a
TV.
1
Select the group to play back by pressing
3
/
4
, and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you select [Picture Only], 4K burst files and images recorded with the Post Focus
function will also be played back.
• For images recorded with the Post Focus function, only an in-focus representative image
will be chosen and played back.
2
Press
3
/
4
to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].
∫ Operations during a slide show
[Slide Show]
> [Playback] > [Slide Show]
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3 Play/Pause 4 Exit slide show
2
Back to previous
picture
1 Ahead to next picture
Reduce volume level
Increase volume
level
MENU
239
9. Menu Guide
∫ Changing the slide show settings
You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the
slide show menu screen.
Playback in [Normal Play], [Picture Only] or [Video Only] can be selected.
Select the group to play back by pressing
3
/
4
, and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you select [Picture Only], 4K burst files and images recorded with the Post Focus function will
also be played back.
[Effect]
This allows you to select the screen effects when switching from one
picture to the next.
[Setup]
[Duration]
• [Duration] can be set only when [OFF] has been selected
as the [Effect] setting.
[Repeat] [ON]/[OFF]
[Sound]
[AUTO]:
Music is played when the still pictures are played back,
and audio is played when the motion pictures are played
back.
[Music]:
Music is played back.
[Audio]:
Audio of motion pictures is played back.
[OFF]:
There will be no sound.
Not available in these cases:
• The [Effect] setting does not work while the following images are played back in a slide show:
– 4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Group Pictures
• The [Duration] setting does not work while the following images are played back in a slide
show:
– Motion pictures
– 4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Group Pictures
[Playback Mode]
> [Playback] > [Playback Mode]
MENU
9. Menu Guide
240
You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.
Select the picture. (P237)
• [999+] is displayed on the screen, if the total number of protects you set for a group pictures is
more than 1000 pictures.
∫ Canceling all the [Protect] settings
Press
3
/
4
to select [Cancel], and then press [MENU/SET].
You can set five different rating levels for images to do the following:
• Delete all the pictures not set as ratings.
• Use the file details view on a PC, etc., to check the rating level. (JPEG images only)
1
Select the picture. (P237)
2
Press
2
/
1
to set the rating level (1–5), and press [MENU/SET] to set.
• When [Multi] has been selected, repeat steps
1
and
2
for each picture.
(It is not possible to use the same setting for a multiple number of pictures.)
• The number of a group pictures will be displayed, if you set for a group pictures. [999+] is
displayed, if the group pictures is more than 1000 pictures.
∫ Canceling all the [Rating] settings
Press
3
/
4
to select [Cancel], and then press [MENU/SET].
• [Cancel] cannot be selected when [Playback Mode] is set to [Picture Only] or [Video Only].
[Protect]
> [Playback] > [Protect]
If you set the Write-Protect switch on the card to [LOCK], images will not be
deleted even when protection is not set for them.
• Be aware that the [Protect] setting may not work on other devices.
• Even if you protect pictures on a card, they will be deleted if the card is formatted.
[Rating]
> [Playback] > [Rating]
MENU
MENU
241
9. Menu Guide
You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped
in prints using [Text Stamp].
1
Select the picture. (P237)
• [ ] is displayed for pictures with titles already registered.
2
Enter the text. (P60)
You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.
1
Press
3
/
4
to select [REPLACE] or [DELETE], and then press [MENU/SET].
2
Press
2
/
1
to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].
3
Press
2
/
1
to select the person and then press [MENU/SET].
4
(When [REPLACE] is selected)
Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the person to replace and then press [MENU/SET].
[Title Edit]
> [Playback] > [Title Edit]
• To delete the title, erase all the text in the text input screen.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Images recorded with [Quality] set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
[Face Rec Edit]
> [Playback] > [Face Rec Edit]
• Cleared information regarding the [Face Recog.] cannot be restored.
• The Face Recognition information of pictures in a group has to be edited at once.
(You cannot edit one picture at a time.)
• Editing of group pictures can be performed only on the first picture of each set.
MENU
MENU
9. Menu Guide
242
You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved
in JPEG format.
1
Select RAW images with
2
/
1
, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2
Press
3
/
4
to select an item.
• You can set the following items. The settings you used for
the recording are selected when you start setting these
items.
[RAW Processing]
> [Playback] > [RAW Processing]
[White Balance]
Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you
select an item with [ ], you can process the image with the setting
at the time of recording.
[Brightness
correction]
Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between j2EV
and i2EV.
[Photo Style]
Allows you to select a photo style effect.
• You cannot select [V-Log L] for pictures taken with effects other
than [V-Log L].
• The effect for pictures taken with [V-Log L] will be fixed to [V-Log L].
[i.Dynamic] Allows you to select an [i.Dynamic] setting.
[Contrast] Allows you to adjust the contrast.
[Highlight] Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.
[Shadow] Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.
[Saturation]/
[Color Tone]
Allows you to adjust the saturation. (When [Monochrome],
[L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected in [Photo Style],
you can adjust the color tone.)
[Filter Effect]
Allows you to select a filter effect. (Only when [Monochrome],
[L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected in [Photo Style].)
[Grain Effect]
You can set the graininess. (Only when [Monochrome],
[L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected for [Photo Style].)
[Noise Reduction] Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.
[i.Resolution] Allows you to select an [i.Resolution] setting.
[Sharpness] Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.
MENU
243
9. Menu Guide
3
Press [MENU/SET] and set.
• Refer to “How to set each item” on P243.
4
Press [MENU/SET].
• This operation returns you to the screen in step
2
. To set other items, repeat steps
2
through
4
.
5
Select [Begin Processing] with
3
/
4
, and then press [MENU/SET].
∫ How to set each item
• When [Noise Reduction], [i.Resolution] or [Sharpness] is selected, the comparison screen
cannot be displayed.
• Each time you touch the screen twice, the display switches between enlarged and normal view.
[More Settings]
Use 3/4 to select items and press [MENU/SET] to perform the
following operations.
[Reinstate Adjustments]:
Returns the settings to the ones you used during the recording.
[Color Space]:
Allows you to select a [Color Space] setting from [sRGB] or [Adobe
RGB].
[Picture Size]:
Allows you to select the size in which the image will be saved in
JPEG format.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
2/1//
/
Dragging Selects a setting.
3
[WB K
Set]
Displays the screen that lets you
set the color temperature. (When
[ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] is
selected in [White Balance])
4 [Adjust.]
Displays the screen that lets you
fine-adjust the White Balance.
(only when [White Balance] is set)
[DISP.] [DISP.] Displays the comparison screen.
[MENU/SET] [Set]
Sets the adjusted level and returns
you to the item selection screen.
+1
+1
+1 +2
+2
+2
-
2
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
1
-
10
0
0
DISP.
DISP.
WBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBc
AWBc
A
WAWBw
AWB
AWB
AWBAWB
1
2
3
4
9. Menu Guide
244
On the comparison screen, you can use the following operations to make adjustments:
A Current setting
• If you touch the picture at the center, it will be enlarged.
If you touch [ ], the picture will be reduced to the original size.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
2/1//
/
Dragging Selects a setting.
[DISP.] [DISP.] Returns you to the setting screen.
[MENU/SET] [Set]
Sets the adjusted level and returns
you to the item selection screen.
• The effects applied through the RAW processing on the camera and those applied through the
RAW processing on the software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio” are not completely identical.
• RAW images recorded with the camera are always recorded in the [4:3] (5184k3888) aspect
ratio. When you process them with [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu, however, their
aspect ratio and [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) settings at the time of recording will be applied to
them.
• (When setting [Picture Size] in [More Settings])
When images enlarged with [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) are processed, their picture size cannot
be set larger than the size at the time of recording.
• The [White Balance] setting of pictures taken with multiple exposures is fixed to the setting at
the time of recording.
• Edit group images one by one. The edited images will be saved as new images separate from
the original group images.
Not available in these cases:
• [RAW Processing] is not available when an HDMI micro cable is connected.
• RAW processing cannot be performed on RAW images recorded with other devices.
DISP.
0
245
9. Menu Guide
Select multiple frames from 4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image that
are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to
combine the frames into one picture.
1
Press
2
/
1
to select the 4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET].
2
Choose the combining method, and then press [MENU/SET].
3
Select [Yes] at the confirmation screen, and then press [MENU/SET].
[Light Composition]
> [Playback] > [Light Composition]
[Composite Merging] setting
Select the frames you want to combine to superimpose brighter parts.
1 Drag the slide bar or use
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the
frames to combine.
2 Press [MENU/SET].
• The selected frames are remembered, and the display
goes to the preview screen.
• Press 3/4 to select items and press [MENU/SET] to
perform the following operations.
– [Next]:
Lets you select more frames for combining.
– [Reselect]:
Discards the frame selected immediately before and lets you select a different image.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select more frames to combine.
• You can select up to 40 frames.
4 Press
3
/
4
to select
[Save]
, and then press [MENU/SET].
[Range Merging] setting
Select the first and last frames to superimpose the brighter parts of the frames
between them.
1 Select the frame of the first picture, and press [MENU/SET].
• The selection method is the same as in step
1
of [Composite Merging] setting.
2 Select the frame of the last picture, and press [MENU/SET].
• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the first frame
such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are also registered.
MENU
9. Menu Guide
246
Select multiple frames from a 4K burst file to create a sequence composition of a moving
subject into one picture.
1
Press
2
/
1
to select the 4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET].
2
Select frames to combine.
[Sequence Composition]
> [Playback] > [Sequence Composition]
Select the frames so that the moving subject will not overlap on the preceding or
subsequent frames. (The sequence composition may not be created properly if the
subject overlaps.)
1 Drag the slide bar or use
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the
frames to combine.
2 Press [MENU/SET].
• The selected frames are remembered, and the display
goes to the preview screen.
• Press 3/4 to select items and press [MENU/SET] to
perform the following operations.
– [Next]:
Lets you select more frames for combining.
– [Reselect]:
Discards the frame selected immediately before and lets you select a different image.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select more frames to combine.
• You can select 3 to 40 frames.
4 Press
3
/
4
to select
[Save]
, and then press [MENU/SET].
• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the first frame
such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are also registered.
Tips for [Sequence Composition]
We recommend using a tripod to take pictures for [Sequence Composition].
MENU
247
9. Menu Guide
• [Clear Retouch] is a setting to be used through
touch operations and automatically enables
touch operation.
1
Press
2
/
1
to select a picture, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2
Drag your finger over the part you want to delete.
• The parts to be erased are colored.
• To return the colored part back to its previous state, touch
[Undo].
3
Touch [Set].
4
Touch [Save] or press [MENU/SET].
[Clear Retouch]
> [Playback] >
[Clear Retouch]
Erasing details (enlarging the display)
1 Touch [SCALING].
• Pinching out/pinching in the screen allows you to
enlarge/reduce it.
• Dragging the screen allows you to move the
enlarged part.
2 Touch [REMOVE].
• This will bring you back to the operation of dragging
your finger over the part you want to delete. The part
you want to delete can be dragged even while the picture is enlarged.
• Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is artificially created.
• For group pictures, perform [Clear Retouch] on each picture.
(They cannot be edited at once.)
• When [Clear Retouch] is performed on group pictures, they are saved as new pictures
separate from the original ones.
Not available in these cases:
• [Clear Retouch] is not available in the following cases:
– When the viewfinder display is in use
– When an HDMI micro cable is connected
• This function is not available in the following types of images:
– Motion pictures
– 4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Pictures taken with [ ]
MENU
6&$/,1*
5(029(
6HW8QGR
6&$/,1*
5(029(
6HW8QGR
9. Menu Guide
248
You can stamp the recording date and time, names, travel destination, travel dates, etc. on
the recorded images.
1
Select the picture. (P237)
• [ ] appears on screen if the picture is stamped with text.
2
Press
3
/
4
to select [Set], and then press [MENU/SET].
3
Press [ ] to return to the previous screen.
4
Press
3
to select [OK], and then press [MENU/SET].
[Text Stamp]
> [Playback] > [Text Stamp]
[Shooting Date] Stamps the recording date.
[Name]
[] (Face Recognition):
Name registered in [Face Recog.] will be stamped.
[] (Baby/Pet):
Name registered in [Profile Setup] will be stamped.
[Location] Stamps the travel destination name set under [Location].
[Travel Date] Stamps the travel date set under [Travel Date].
[Title] Title input in the [Title Edit] will be stamped.
• When you print pictures stamped with text, the date will be printed over the stamped text if you
specify printing of the date at the photo shop.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Multi].
• The picture quality may deteriorate when text stamping is carried out.
• When you stamp pictures in a group, the stamped ones are saved separately from the original
ones in the group.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Pictures recorded without setting the clock and title
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures recorded with [Quality] set to [ ]
LISALISALISA
MENU
249
9. Menu Guide
To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of
pixels) is reduced.
[Resize]
> [Playback] > [Resize]
Select the picture and size.
[Single] setting
1 Press
2
/
1
to select the picture, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Press
3
/
4
to select the size, and then press
[MENU/SET].
[Multi] setting
1 Press
3
/
4
to select the size, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the picture, and then
press [MENU/SET] to set (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed
again.
3 Press [DISP.] to execute.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Multi].
• The picture quality of the resized picture will deteriorate.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Group Pictures
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures recorded with [Quality] set to [ ]
MENU
20
M
20
M
20
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
5
M
5
M
5
M
L
4:3
M
4:3
S
4:3
Set
OK
ュリヴヱハ
9. Menu Guide
250
You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.
1
Press
2
/
1
to select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET].
2
Use the rear dial and press
3
/
4
/
2
/
1
to select the parts to be cropped.
3
Press [MENU/SET].
[Cropping]
> [Playback] > [Cropping]
Button operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
Enlarges the picture
Reduces the picture
3/4/2/1 Drag Moves the enlarged area
• The picture quality of the cropped picture will deteriorate.
• Crop one picture at a time when you want to crop the pictures in a picture group.
(You cannot edit all pictures in a group at once.)
• When you crop pictures in a group, the cropped ones are saved separately from the original
ones in the group.
• Information regarding the Face Recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images
having undergone [Cropping].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures recorded with [Quality] set to [ ]
MENU
251
9. Menu Guide
Rotate pictures manually in 90
o
steps.
• The [Rotate] function is disabled when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF].
1
Press
2
/
1
to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].
2
Select the rotation direction.
[]:
The picture rotates clockwise in steps of 90
o
.
[]:
The picture rotates counter-clockwise in steps of 90
o
.
Recorded motion picture and 4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended for
when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.
Dividing a file is permanent. Decide before you divide!
1
Press
2
/
1
to select the file to divide, and then press [MENU/SET].
[Rotate] (The picture is rotated manually.)
> [Playback] > [Rotate]
[Video Divide]
> [Playback] > [Video Divide]
2
Press
3
at the location to divide.
• You can finely adjust the location for division by pressing
2/1 while the file is paused.
3
Press
4
.
• The file may be lost if the card or battery is removed while
processing the dividing.
Not available in these cases:
• It may not be possible to divide a file at a point near the beginning or end.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When the recording time is short.
MENU
MENU
9. Menu Guide
252
This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with
[Time Lapse Shot].
1
Select the [Time Lapse Shot] picture group with
2
/
1
, and then press [MENU/
SET].
2
Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it.
• Refer to P135 for details.
A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with [Stop Motion Animation].
1
Select the Stop Motion Animation group with
2
/
1
, and then press [MENU/SET].
2
Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it.
• Refer to P135 for details.
This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the
camera vertically.
[Time Lapse Video]
> [Playback] > [Time Lapse Video]
[Stop Motion Video]
> [Playback] > [Stop Motion Video]
[Rotate Disp.] (The picture is automatically rotated and displayed.)
> [Playback] > [Rotate Disp.] > [ON]
Not available in these cases:
• When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless
the OS or software is compatible with Exif.
Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording information etc. to be added. It was
established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association)”.
MENU
MENU
MENU
253
9. Menu Guide
You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.
This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen
for deleting a picture is displayed.
It is set to [“No” first] at the time of purchase.
Deletes all images in a card.
[Picture Sort]
> [Playback] > [Picture Sort]
[FILE NAME]
Displays images by folder name/file name. This display format allows you
to locate images in the card easily.
[DATE/TIME]
Displays images by recording date. If the card contains pictures taken with
more than one camera, this display format is convenient for looking for
images.
• When you insert another card, images may not be displayed by [DATE/TIME] first.
The images will be displayed by [DATE/TIME] if you wait for a while.
[Delete Confirmation]
> [Playback] > [Delete Confirmation]
[“Yes” first] [Yes] is highlighted first, so deletion can be done quickly.
[“No” first] [No] is highlighted first. Accidental deletion of pictures is avoided.
[Delete All Images]
> [Playback] > [Delete All Images]
[Delete All] Deletes all images in a card.
[Delete All
Non-rating]
Deletes all images except those with a rating set.
• [Delete All] can be used when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play].
• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted.
Carefully confirm the images before deletion.
• Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may take some time to delete them.
MENU
MENU
MENU
254
10.
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
®
function/Bluetooth
®
function
This chapter explains the Wi-Fi
®
and Bluetooth
®
functions of the camera.
• This document refers to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones.
∫ Before Use
• Set the clock. (P35)
• To use the Wi-Fi function on this camera, a destination device equipped with the wireless LAN
function is required.
∫ About the WIRELESS connection lamp
• In [Wireless Connection Lamp] in the [Setup] menu, you can set
the lamp so that it will not light/flash. (P228)
Lit blue
When the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function is ON or
connected
Blinking blue
When sending image data by operating the
camera
• Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception
while sending images.
• It is recommended to use a fully charged battery when sending images.
• Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If the connection is
terminated while sending pictures, pictures with missing sections may be sent.
255
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Connecting to a smartphone
Connect with a smartphone which has the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” (below: “LUMIX
Sync”) smartphone app installed.
Use “LUMIX Sync” for remote recording and image transfers.
“LUMIX Sync” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.
• Supported OS
• Use the latest version.
• Supported OSs are current as of January 2025 and are subject to change.
• Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to operate.
• The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.
For information on the “LUMIX Sync”, refer to the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
Installing “LUMIX Sync”
Android
TM
:
Android 10 or higher
iOS:
iOS 15 or higher
1
Connect the smartphone to a network.
2
(Android) Select “Google Play
TM
Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3
Enter “LUMIX” or “panasonic lumix sync” into the search box.
4
Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” .
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
256
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a smartphone that
supports Bluetooth Low Energy. When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically
connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi.
• For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.
For information about connecting for the second and subsequent times (P258)
• Supported smartphones
• Turn on the Bluetooth function on the smartphone beforehand.
1
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
• A message regarding device (camera) registration is displayed. Select [Next].
• If you have closed the message, select [ ], then register the camera using [Camera
registration (pairing)].
2
Check the content in the displayed guide and select [Next] until the screen to
register the camera is displayed.
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection)
Android
TM
:
Android 10 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher
(excluding those that do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)
iOS: iOS 15 or higher
LUMIX Sync
257
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Operating the camera in accordance with the smartphone guide.
3
Set the camera to Bluetooth pairing standby state.
• The camera enters pairing standby state and the device name (A) is displayed.
4
On the smartphone, select the camera’s device name.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed, select
[Join].
5
When a message indicating that device registration is complete, select [OK].
• A Bluetooth connection between the camera and the smartphone will be made.
• The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.
• During Bluetooth connection, [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established with the
smartphone, [ ] appears translucent.
• Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.
If you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information will be deleted from
the oldest first.
∫ End Bluetooth Connection
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of the camera.
• Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be deleted.
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [SET] > [Pairing]
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [OFF]
MENU
(A)
XXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
MENU
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
258
∫ Connecting to a Paired Smartphone
Connect paired smartphones using the following procedure.
1
Enable the Bluetooth function of the camera.
2
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for cameras, close
the message.
3
Select [ ].
4
Select [Bluetooth Setup].
5
Turn Bluetooth ON.
6
From [Registered camera(s)] items, select the camera’s device name.
• Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect to one
smartphone at a time.
• When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the smartphone and
camera and re-establishing the connection may result in the camera being detected correctly.
∫ Canceling Pairing
1
Cancel the pairing setting of the camera.
2
Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.
• Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.
• When [Reset] in the [Setup] menu is used to reset the network settings, the information for
registered devices is deleted.
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [ON]
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [SET] > [Delete]
MENU
LUMIX Sync
Bluetooth
XXXXXXXX
MENU
259
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Use Wi-Fi to connect the camera and a smartphone.
• When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
∫ Scanning QR code to connect
1
Display the QR code (B).
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Wi-Fi].
(P56)
• Press [MENU/SET] to enlarge the QR code.
2
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for cameras, close
the message.
3
Select [ ].
4
Select [Wi-Fi connection].
5
Select [QR code].
6
Scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the camera using “LUMIX Sync”.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed, select
[Join].
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Remote Shooting & View]
MENU
(B)
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
260
∫ Manually entering a password to connect
1
Display the screen in Step
1
of “Scanning QR code to connect”. (P259)
2
In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3
On the Wi-Fi setup screen, select the SSID (C) displayed on the camera.
4
(At the first connection) Enter the password (C) displayed on the camera.
5
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
To end the Wi-Fi connection between the camera and smartphone, follow the steps below.
1
Press the shutter button halfway to put the camera in recording mode.
2
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Wi-Fi].
(P56)
3
On the smartphone, close the “LUMIX Sync”.
Terminating the Wi-Fi connection
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes]
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
XXXXXXXX
i
i
(C)
MENU
261
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
This explains the functions for operating the camera from a smartphone.
Functions described in this document with the ( ) symbol require a smartphone
that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
∫ Home Screen
When you start up “LUMIX Sync”, the home screen is displayed.
(A) : App settings (P258, 259, 268)
This allows connection settings, camera power operations, and displays Help.
(B) : [Import images] (P265)
(C) : [Remote shooting] (P262)
(D) : [Shutter Remote Control] (P263)
Bluetooth
LUMIX Sync
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
262
You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while viewing the live view
images from the camera.
Preparations:
• Connect to a smartphone. (P256, 259)
• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Remote shooting]) in the home screen.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed, select
[Join].
2
Start recording.
• The recorded image is saved on the camera.
(E) Takes a picture
(F) Starts/ends the video recording
∫ Operation Method During Remote Recording
Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during
remote recording.
• The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is active.
[Remote shooting]
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [Priority of Remote Device]
[Camera]
Allows you to perform operations with both the camera and the smartphone.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone.
[Smartphone]
Allows you to perform operations only with the smartphone.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the smartphone.
• To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the camera to turn on
the screen, and select [End].
Not available in these cases:
• In the following case, remote recording does not work:
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
(E) (F)
MENU
263
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.
Preparations:
• Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P256)
• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Shutter Remote Control]) in the home screen.
2
Start recording.
[Shutter Remote Control]
Starts/ends the video recording
Takes a picture
About [B] (Bulb)
You can perform [B] (Bulb) recording by setting the shutter speed to [B] (Bulb) in Manual
Exposure Mode. (Up to 30 minutes)
This function is useful when you take pictures of stars in the night sky or a night scene,
since the shutter can be kept open from start of recording to end of recording.
Preparations:
• Set the camera to [M] mode. (P70)
• Set the camera shutter speed to [B] (Bulb). (P71)
Operate the smartphone
1 Touch [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your finger).
2 Release your finger from [ ] to end recording.
• Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button fixed in the fully
pressed condition. (Slide [ ] back in the opposite direction or press the shutter button of
the camera to end recording.)
• If Bluetooth is disconnected during the [B] (Bulb) recording, reconnect Bluetooth and perform
the operation to end recording using the smartphone.
Bluetooth
LOCK
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
264
∫ Reducing the time to recover from [Sleep Mode]
Select the smartphone function to be used as a priority function when waking the camera
from [Sleep Mode] with a smartphone.
Preparation:
Set [Bluetooth] and [Remote Wakeup] to [ON]. (P268)
• [Shutter Remote Control] is available when the camera on/off switch is set to [ON].
• The live view image of the camera cannot be monitored on the smartphone.
• When the camera turns off after [Sleep Mode] is activated during recording, you can reselect
[Shutter Remote Control] on the smartphone to turn it on again. (The following settings are
required.)
– [Remote Wakeup]: [ON]
– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF]
• The camera cannot be turned on by using [Shutter Remote Control].
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Returning from Sleep Mode]
[Import / Remote
Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Import images]
or [Remote shooting].
[Shutter Remote Priority]
Shortens the time required to wake the camera with
[Shutter Remote Control].
MENU
265
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Transfer an image stored on the card to the smartphone connected via Wi-Fi.
Preparations:
• Connect to a smartphone. (P256, 259)
• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Import images]) in the home screen.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed, select
[Join].
2
Select the image to transfer.
3
Transfer the image.
Select [ ].
• If the image is a video, you can play it back by touching [ ] at the center of the screen.
[Import images]
• When a video is played back, this has a small data size and is transmitted using “LUMIX
Sync”, therefore its image quality will differ from that of the actual video recording.
Depending on the smartphone and on the usage conditions, the image quality may
deteriorate or the sound may skip during video or picture playback.
• It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
266
You can automatically transfer recorded pictures to a smartphone as they are taken.
Preparations:
• Connect to a smartphone using Bluetooth. (P256)
1
Enable [Auto Transfer] on the camera.
• If a confirmation screen is displayed on the camera asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection, select [Yes] to terminate it.
2
On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS
devices).
• The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
3
Check the send settings on the camera and then press [MENU/SET].
• Automatic image transfer is possible when [ ] is displayed on the camera recording
screen.
4
Record with the camera.
• [ ] is displayed while a file is being sent.
∫ To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images
• A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi connection.
[Auto Transfer]
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Auto Transfer] > [ON]
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Auto Transfer] > [OFF]
• If the [Bluetooth] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON], the camera
automatically connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth when you turn on the
camera.
Start up the “LUMIX Sync” on the smartphone to connect to the camera.
• Images are not transferred while the recording screen of the camera is displayed on the
smartphone in [Remote shooting].
• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] cannot be used.
• If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is interrupted, then turn
on the camera to restart the sending.
– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no longer be
possible.
– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be possible.
• Images recorded with the following function cannot be transferred automatically:
– Video recording
Bluetooth
MENU
MENU
267
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth, and the
camera performs recording while writing the acquired location information.
Preparations:
Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
1
Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P256)
2
Select the camera’s menu.
• The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded and [ ] will
be displayed on the recording screen.
3
Take pictures on the camera.
• Location information will be written to the recorded pictures.
[Location Logging]
A The smartphone acquires
location information.
B The smartphone sends the
location information.
C The camera performs recording
while writing the location
information.
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Location Logging] > [ON]
When [ ] appears translucent
Location information is not acquired, so data cannot be written. Positioning with the GPS on the
smartphone may not be possible if the smartphone is in a location such as a building or a bag.
• Move the smartphone to a location where positioning performance can be optimized, such as
one that offers a wide view of the sky, to try positioning.
• Refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
• Images with location information are indicated with [ ].
• The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject
when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
Bluetooth
GPS
Bluetooth
MENU
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
268
Even when the camera is turned off, the smartphone can be used to start the camera and
record images, or check the recorded images.
Preparations:
1 Connect to a smartphone using Bluetooth. (P256)
2 Enable [Remote Wakeup] on the camera.
3 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
4 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
∫ Turning On the Camera
Select [Remote shooting] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed, select [Join].
• The camera turns on, and automatically connects using Wi-Fi.
∫ Turning Off the Camera
1 Select [ ] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
2 Select [Turn off the camera].
3 Select [Power OFF].
Synchronize the [Clock Set] setting and the [Home] or [Destination] setting in [World
Time], which are all located in the [Setup] menu of the camera, with the corresponding
settings of a smartphone.
1
Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P256)
2
Select the camera’s menu.
[Remote Wakeup]
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Remote Wakeup] > [ON]
• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], images recorded while remote operation is running are
automatically transferred to a smartphone.
If [Power OFF] is selected while there are still unsent images, sending is resumed when the
camera is next turned on.
• When [Remote Wakeup] has been set, the Bluetooth function continues to work even if the
camera on/off switch is set to [OFF], so the battery will drain.
[Auto Clock Set]
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Auto Clock Set] > [ON]
Bluetooth
MENU
Bluetooth
MENU
269
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Sending images to a smartphone
Preparations:
• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (P255)
1
Connecting to a Smartphone
• Scanning QR code to connect. (P259)
• Manually entering a password to connect. (P260)
2
Select a device you want to connect.
3
Check the send settings, and then press [MENU/SET].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P275)
When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
4
Take pictures. (P270)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
4
Select the picture. (P270)
∫ Images that can be sent with this camera
¢ Files larger than 4 GB cannot be sent.
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] > [Send
Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the Camera]
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
Destination device
Images that can be sent
[Send Images While
Recording]
[Send Images Stored in the
Camera]
Smartphone JPEG / RAW JPEG / RAW / MP4
¢
• Some images may not be sent or played back depending on the device.
• For details about playback of images, refer to the operating instructions for the destination
device.
MENU
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
270
A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it.
• While sending a file, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• Do the following to terminate the connection:
• You cannot change the settings while sending pictures.
Images can be selected and sent after recording.
[Send Images While Recording]
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes]
• Since the camera gives priority to recording, sending may take longer during the recording.
• If you turn off the camera or terminate the Wi-Fi connection before the transmission is
completed, unsent files will not be resent.
• You may not be able to delete files or use the playback menu while sending.
• If you set [Time Lapse Shot], the Wi-Fi connection is terminated and you cannot use this
function.
[Send Images Stored in the Camera]
[Single Select] setting
1
Select the picture.
2
Press [MENU/SET].
[Multi Select] setting
1
Select the picture. (repeat)
• The setting is canceled when the picture is selected
again.
2
Press [DISP.] to execute.
• To close the connection, select [Exit].
• It may not be possible to send images recorded with devices other than this camera, or
images edited or processed on a PC.
MENU
6HW
OK
ュリヴヱハ
271
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by pressing
4
during playback.
You can also use the menu to connect easily.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with [Send
Image (Smartphone)]. (P56)
Preparations:
• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (P255)
• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (P256)
• Press [ ] on the camera to display the playback screen.
Send a single image
1 Press 2/1 to select the image.
2 Press 4.
3 Select [Single Select].
• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (P275)
4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).
• This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
Send multiple images
1 Press 4.
2 Select [Multi Select].
• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (P275)
3 Select the images and then transfer.
2/1: Select images
[MENU/SET]: Set/Cancel
[DISP.]: Transfer
4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).
• This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
∫ When sending pictures in picture groups
Do the steps below to transfer the pictures in picture groups (P187) to a smartphone:
1 When the picture group is selected, press 4.
2 Press 3 to display the submenu.
3 Press ▲/▼ to select [Send Image (Smartphone)] and then press [MENU/SET].
4 Press ▲/▼ to select [Single Select] or [Multi Select], and then press [MENU/SET].
• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (P275)
• The operations after this are the same as steps
3
and
4
in “Send a single image” and
“Send multiple images”.
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple
Operations
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
272
Settings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]
• If [Single Select], press 2/1 to select the image and then press [MENU/SET] to execute.
• If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “Send multiple images”. (P271)
Using the menu to transfer easily
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Send Image (Smartphone)]
• It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
• When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to complete.
• If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is completed, then
sending will not restart.
• You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
• When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
MENU
273
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi connections
The following types of connections are available.
Wi-Fi connection history is saved in History when the Wi-Fi function is used. Connecting
from History allows you to easily connect with the same Wi-Fi settings as used previously.
• If the settings of the device to connect to have been changed, it may not be possible to connect
to the device.
1
Select the menu.
2
Select item.
• You can display details of the connection by pressing [DISP.].
∫ Register to favorite
1 Select the menu.
2 Select the item you wish to register and press
1
.
3 Enter a registration name.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P60.
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as two
characters.
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function]
[New Connection] Makes settings for connection to a smartphone.
[Select a destination from History]/
[Select a destination from Favorite]
Connection is made using the same settings as the
previous time. (P273)
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function]
[Select a destination from
History]
Connects with previously-used settings.
[Select a destination from
Favorite]
Connects with settings registered as favorites.
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[Select a destination from History]
MENU
MENU
MENU
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
274
∫ Editing items registered in favorite
1 Select the menu.
2 Select the Favorites item you wish to edit and press
1
.
You can perform the following operations by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Wi-Fi]
after connecting to Wi-Fi. (P56)
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[Select a destination from Favorite]
[Remove from Favorite] —
[Change the Order in
Favorite]
Select the destination.
[Change the Registered
Name]
• How to enter text (P60)
• Because the number of items that can be saved in History is limited, register frequently-used
connection settings to Favorites.
• Performing [Reset Network Settings] deletes data registered in History and Favorites.
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]
[Terminate the Connection] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
[Change the Destination]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select a
different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for
Sending Images]
Sets the image size, file format, and other items for sending
recorded images. (P275)
[Register the Current
Destination to Favorite]
Registers the current connection destination or method so that
you can easily connect with the same connection settings next
time.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the camera.
(P276)
• Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may not be
able to perform some of these operations.
MENU
275
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Send Settings
Set the size, file format, and other items for sending the image to the destination device.
1
After Wi-Fi connection, the send settings
confirmation screen will be displayed, so press
[DISP.].
2
Change the send settings.
Image Send Settings
[Size]
Resize the image to send.
[Original]/[Change] ([M], [S] or [VGA])
[File Format]
Sets the file format of images to send.
[JPG]/[RAWiJPG]/[RAW]
• This setting is possible when the destination supports the sending
of RAW images from this camera.
10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
276
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.
The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.
This sets the higher priority between the camera and smartphone to perform operations
during remote recording. (P262)
You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.
1 Press [DISP.].
2 Enter the desired device name.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P60.
• A maximum of 32 characters can be entered.
To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect
saved personal information, we recommend protecting the Wi-Fi function with a password.
• Once a password is set, you are required to enter it each time you use the Wi-Fi function.
• If you forget the password, you can reset it with [Reset Network Settings] in the [Setup] menu.
Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.
• A MAC Address is a unique address that is used to identify network equipment.
• IP address refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to a network such as the Internet.
Usually, the addresses for homes are automatically assigned by the DHCP function such as a
wireless access point. (Example: 192.168.0.87)
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup]
[Priority of Remote Device]
[Device Name]
[Wi-Fi Function Lock]
[Setup]
Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P60.
[Cancel] Cancel the password.
[Network Address]
MENU
277
11.
Connecting to other devices
Connecting
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)
• Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.
∫ HDMI socket
Connect the camera and HDMI device (TV, etc.) with a commercially available HDMI
micro cable.
A [HDMI] socket
B HDMI micro cable
C HDMI socket (on the TV)
• Use a High Speed HDMI micro cable (Type D–Type A plug) with the length less than 3 m
(9.8 feet).
∫ USB port
Use a USB connection cable (commercially available) to connect the camera to a PC
or recorder.
A [USB/CHARGE] socket
B USB connection cable
• Use a USB connection cable that complies with the USB standards.
HDMI
11. Connecting to other devices
278
Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen
Preparations: Turn off the camera and TV.
1
Connect the camera and the TV with an HDMI micro cable. (P277)
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely
or in wrong direction.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
2
Turn on the TV and select the input to match the connector in use.
3
Turn the camera on and then press [ ].
• Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], black bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the
left and right of the pictures.
• Change the screen mode on your TV if the picture is displayed with the top or bottom cut off.
• Check the [HDMI Mode (Play)]. (P232)
• To play back 24p motion pictures, set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to [AUTO]. Otherwise, the picture is
not output at 24 frames per second.
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
Depending on the TV to be connected, 4K burst files may not be played back correctly.
• No image will be displayed on the monitor/viewfinder of the camera. In addition, no audio will
be output from the speaker of the camera.
• HDMI output will be canceled if a USB connection cable is connected simultaneously.
• Read the operating instructions for the TV.
279
11. Connecting to other devices
When using the HDMI output, you can record pictures and
motion pictures while monitoring the camera image on an
external monitor, TV or similar device.
∫ Setting the information display during HDMI output
Select whether or not to output the information display of the camera to an external device
connected via HDMI.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Recording while monitoring camera images
> [Setup] > [TV Connection] > [HDMI Info Display (Rec)]
• When using the HDMI output during recording, the image quality is automatically switched in
accordance with the connecting device. However, in the following cases, images will be output
in accordance with the [Rec Quality] in the menu. (If the setting is not supported by the
connecting device, the camera will switch the image quality in accordance with the device.)
– When recording motion pictures
– In Creative Video Mode
– When [Rec Area] is set to [ ]
• [Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu is fixed to [16:9].
• If the camera is connected to an external monitor or TV that supports 4K motion picture, using
the following settings will cause the angle of view to become even narrower than usual:
• With camera models DC-G97P/DC-G97PP:
– [4K/100M/30p]/[4K/100M/24p] in [Rec Quality]
– [4K Live Cropping]
• With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
– [4K/100M/30p]/[4K/100M/25p]/[4K/100M/24p] in [Rec Quality]
– [4K Live Cropping]
• When [ ] is selected for the AF Mode or during MF Assist, the enlarged display is not
output.
• Ex. Tele Conv. (motion picture) does not work (excluding Creative Video Mode).
• Electronic sounds and electronic shutter sounds are muted.
• When you check the image and sound from the TV connected to the camera, the microphone
of the camera may pick up the sound from the speakers of the TV, producing an abnormal
sound (audio feedback). If this occurs, move the camera away from the TV or lower the
volume on the TV.
• If you connect to a Wi-Fi network during HDMI output, no image will be displayed on the
monitor of the camera.
• Some setting screens are not output via HDMI.
• There is no output via HDMI in the following cases:
– When recording 4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
MENU
11. Connecting to other devices
280
Preparations:
1
Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with an HDMI
micro cable (P278).
2
Turn the camera on and then press [ ].
3
Operate with the remote control for the TV.
Turning this unit off:
If you use the remote control for the TV to turn the TV off, this unit is also turned off.
Automatic input switching:
• If you connect with an HDMI micro cable and then turn this unit on, and then press [ ], the
input channel on the TV automatically switches to this unit’s screen. If the TV’s power is in
standby status, it will turn on automatically (if [Set] has been selected for the TV’s [Power on
link] setting).
Using VIERA Link (HDMI)
What is the VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)?
• This function allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations
when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI micro
cable for automatic linked operations.
(Not all operations are possible.)
• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function using the
standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.
Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not
guaranteed. When using devices made by other companies that are compatible with
VIERA Link, refer to the operating instructions for the respective devices.
• This unit supports “VIERA Link Ver.5” function. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for
Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s
conventional VIERA Link equipment.
> [Setup] > [TV Connection] > [VIERA Link] > [ON]
• Operation using the buttons on this unit will be limited.
• To play back the sound of a film during a slide show, set [Sound] to [AUTO] or [Audio] on the
Slide Show setting screen.
• Use a High Speed HDMI micro cable (Type D–Type A plug) with the length less than 3 m
(9.8 feet).
• Refer to P305 if VIERA Link is not operating correctly.
MENU
281
11. Connecting to other devices
Importing images to a PC
If you connect the camera to a PC, you can copy the recorded images to the PC.
You will need to use software that is compatible with the recorded video format in order to
play back or edit video on the PC.
You can also use software for processing and editing RAW images. (P283)
After connecting to the PC, you can copy the recorded images by dragging files and
folders on this camera to the PC.
∫ PC that can be used
The camera can be connected to a PC running any of the following OSs which can detect
mass storage devices.
Supported OS
Preparations:
Turn on the camera and PC.
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection cable (commercially
available).
2
Press 3/4 to select [PC(Storage)], and then press [MENU/SET].
3
Drag the files and folders from the camera to the PC.
Copying Images to a PC
Windows: Windows 10, Windows 11
Mac: macOS 12.0 to 12.7, 13.0 to 13.6, 14.0 to 14.2
11. Connecting to other devices
282
∫ Folder structure inside card
You can drag and drop the folders and files containing the images you want to transfer into
separate folders on your PC to save them.
For Windows: A drive ([LUMIX]) is displayed in [Computer]
For Mac: A drive ([LUMIX]) is displayed on the desktop
Card
DCIM: Still/motion pictures
1 Folder number
2 Color space P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
3 File number
4 JPG: Still pictures
RW2: Pictures in RAW files
MP4: [MP4] Motion pictures
4K burst file
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] menu, the camera will be automatically
connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection screen being displayed. (P231)
• Take care not to turn off the camera while images are being imported.
• After importing of the images is completed, perform the operation to safely remove the USB
connection cable on the PC.
• Before removing or inserting the card, turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection
cable. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.
DCIM
100XXXXX
101XXXXX
999XXXXX
PXXX0001.JPG
PXXX0002.JPG
PXXX1000.JPG
283
11. Connecting to other devices
Install the software to process and edit RAW images.
• To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.
• Supported OSs are current as of January 2025 and are subject to change.
This software processes and edits RAW images.
Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be displayed on a PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/
• Operating environment
• For more information such as how to use “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the Help or the
Adwaa’s support site.
Installing Software
SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10 (64 bit), Windows 11
Mac: macOS 10.13 to 10.15, 11, 12, 13, 14
11. Connecting to other devices
284
Storing on a Recorder
You can connect the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD recorder and
store pictures and motion pictures on it.
Preparations:
Turn on the camera and the recorder.
1
Connect the recorder and camera with the USB connection cable
(commercially available). (P277)
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
2
Press 3/4 to select [PC(Storage)], and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you set the [USB Mode] to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] menu, the [USB Mode]
selection screen will not be displayed and the camera will automatically connect to the
recorder.
• A message about charging may be displayed. Wait until the display disappears.
3
Operate the recorder to copy.
• See the operating instructions for the recorder about the details about copying and
playing back.
• Modes such as 4K motion picture may not be supported depending on the recorder
being used.
• Use a sufficiently charged battery. If the remaining battery power becomes low while the
camera and the recorder are communicating, the alarm beeps. In that case, cancel copying
immediately. Otherwise, damage may be caused to the data.
• Before removing or inserting the card, turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection
cable. Otherwise, damage may be caused to the recorded data.
285
12.
Materials
Digital Camera Accessory System
(Product numbers correct as of January 2025.)
¢1 Supplied with an AC adaptor and a USB connection cable. (Charging time: Approx. 175 min)
¢2 Supplied with an AC cable/AC mains lead and USB connection cable.
¢3 Use if the attached lens interferes with the tripod head.
• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
• For lens-related optional accessories such as compatible lenses and filters, refer to our
catalogs/website, etc.
• For the latest information on optional accessories, refer to our catalogs/website, etc.
Product name Product number
Battery Pack DMW-BLC12
Battery Charger DMW-BTC12
¢1
AC Adaptor DMW-AC11
¢2
Battery Grip DMW-BGG1
Stereo Shotgun Microphone DMW-MS2
Stereo Microphone VW-VMS10
Shutter Remote Control DMW-RS2
Tripod Grip DMW-SHGR2, DMW-SHGR1
Tripod Adaptor DMW-TA1
¢3
Body Cap DMW-BDC1
12. Materials
286
Optional accessories
• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
When mounted on the camera, the Battery Grip (DMW-BGG1:
optional) improves ease of operation and grip when the camera is
held vertically.
Also, inserting a battery into the Battery Grip provides a stable
supply of power even for long periods of recording.
A Battery Grip (DMW-BGG1: optional) is supplied with a battery
pack (DMW-BLC12).
∫ Battery Grip button operations
When the Battery Grip is attached to the camera, the Battery Grip
buttons operate as follows:
A [ ] (Exposure compensation) button/[Fn] button:
Operates as the exposure compensation button.
B Function button:
Operates the same as the Fn button (Fn1).
∫ Selecting battery usage priority
Preparations:
• Turn the camera off, and remove the cover for the Battery Grip connector.
1 Attach the Battery Grip to the camera.
2 Turn on the camera.
3 Select the menu.
Battery Grip (optional)
> [Setup] > [Battery Use Priority]
[BODY]: The battery in the camera is used first.
[BG]: The battery in the Battery Grip is used first.
• When the battery in the Battery Grip is used, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
• When the cover for the Battery Grip connector is difficult to remove, move the corner of the
camera with a groove towards the center when removing.
• Read the operating instructions of the Battery Grip for details.
MENU
287
12. Materials
When connected to the [REMOTE] socket on the camera, the
Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) can be used for the
following purposes:
– Fully pressing the shutter button without camera shake
– Securing the shutter button during bulb recording and burst
recording
– Start/end the motion picture recording
∫ Shutter Remote Control Motion picture button
You can disable the Motion picture button when not recording a motion picture to prevent
erroneous operation.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Shutter Remote Control (optional)
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Video Rec. Button (Remote)]
• Always use a genuine Panasonic Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional).
• Read the operating instructions of the Shutter Remote Control for details.
Not available in these cases:
• You cannot use the Shutter Remote Control for the following operation.
– Canceling [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] or [Power Save LVF Shooting]
MENU
12. Materials
288
Using a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or stereo microphone
(VW-VMS10: optional), you can record sounds with quality superior to those recorded with
the built-in microphone.
Preparations:
• Close the built-in flash and set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
A Hot shoe
B [MIC] socket
C Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional)
Stereo microphone (VW-VMS10: optional)
• Use a stereo microphone cable with the length less than 3 m (9.8 feet).
• When attaching to the camera, remove the hot shoe cover. (P153)
∫ [Special Mic.]
When the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) is attached, you can set the
microphone sound pickup range in [Special Mic.].
1 Attach the Stereo Shotgun Microphone to the camera.
2 Turn on the camera.
3 Select the menu.
4 (When [MANUAL] is selected)
Press
2
/
1
to select a range, and press [MENU/SET].
External Microphone (optional)
> [Motion Picture] > [Special Mic.]
[STEREO]
Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.
[LENS AUTO]
Picks up sound from a range that matches the lens angle of view.
[SHOTGUN]
Allows recording from one direction by shutting out background and
surrounding noise.
[S.SHOTGUN]
Picks up sound from a specific direction narrower than the range of
[SHOTGUN].
[MANUAL]
Picks up sound from a manually set range.
MENU
289
12. Materials
∫ [Wind Cut]
This can reduce wind noise when an external microphone is being used.
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
• This is available when an external microphone is connected.
• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.
Attach a Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR2, DMW-SHGR1: optional) to use it as a grip for
recording while walking, a tripod, or a Shutter Remote Control.
• Use the adaptor cable supplied with the Tripod Grip to connect to the [REMOTE] socket on the
camera.
> [Motion Picture] > [Wind Cut]
• While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
• When the external microphone is connected, [Sound Rec Level Disp.] is automatically set to
[ON], and the sound rec level is displayed on the screen.
• When an external microphone is attached to the camera, do not hold only the external
microphone to prevent the camera from falling.
• When an external microphone is attached to the camera, do not open the built-in flash.
• If the noises are recorded when you use an AC adaptor (optional), use a battery.
• When a stereo microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) is used, [Special Mic.] is fixed to
[STEREO].
• When [Special Mic.] is set to [LENS AUTO], [S.SHOTGUN] or [MANUAL], [Sound Output] in
the [Motion Picture] menu is fixed to [REC SOUND].
• When [Special Mic.] is set to [MANUAL], you can use the Fn button function [Mic. Directivity
Adjust]. Press the set Fn button to display the range setting screen.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of the external microphone.
Tripod Grip (optional)
• Always use a genuine Panasonic Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR2, DMW-SHGR1: optional).
• Do not carry just by holding the hand strap when the camera is attached.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the Tripod Grip.
MENU
12. Materials
290
Monitor Display/Viewfinder Display
Display example: When [ ] (monitor style) is set and the monitor display is in use
• The information displayed, such as histograms, magnifications, and numeric values, are only
for the purpose of reference.
In recording
989898
2
0000
2
00
2
00
606060
F
3.53.5
F
3.5
AFSAFSAFS
BKTBKTBKT
L
4:3
00
BKTBKTBKT
AELAELAEL
BKTBKTBKT
AWBAWBAWB
BKTBKTBKT
60
p
Fn8Fn8Fn8Fn8
Fn5Fn5Fn5Fn5
Fn4Fn4Fn4Fn4
Fn6Fn6Fn6Fn6
Fn7Fn7Fn7Fn7
MINIMINIMINIMINI
ISOISO
SSSSSS
FF
ラュンラュン
ISOISO
SSSSSS
FF
1
Recording Mode (P40)
Motion picture recording mode
(P163)
Photo Style (P194)
Flash Mode (P156)
Flash (P158, 161)
Extra Tele Conversion (when
recording motion pictures)
(P147)
Recording quality (P165)
Snap Movie (P170)
Aspect Ratio (P192)/
Picture size (P192)
Extra Tele Conversion (when
taking still pictures) (P147)
Filter effect adjustment (P83,
196)
Filter setting (P196)
Loop Recording (P117)
Card (displayed only during
recording) (P29)
Elapsed recording time
¢1
(P163)
P
C1
1
EXPS
EXPS
WL
60
p
60
p
SNAP
4SEC
L
4:3
EXM
4:3
EXPS
8
m
30
s
Simultaneous recording
indicator (P169)
Automatic viewfinder/monitor
switching (P38)
Peaking (P217)
Highlight Shadow (P198)
HDR (P205)/iHDR (P64)
Live View Composite recording
(P72)
Multi exposure (P206)
Digital Zoom (P149)
Electronic shutter (P203)
Picture-taking during motion
picture recording (Photo
Priority) (P169)
Overheat indicator (P299)
ラュン
291
12. Materials
2
Quality (P193)
S&Q Effect (P180)
Focus Mode (P88, 100)
Focus Bracket (P139)
Post Focus (P126)
AF Mode (P90)
Pull Focus (P172)
Face Recognition (P223)
AF Lock (P103)
Burst (P112)
4K Photo (P115)
Self-timer (P136)
Battery indication (P27)
Power is being supplied (P26)
Battery Grip (P286)
Image Stabilizer (P141)
Jitter alert (P142)
4K Pre-Burst/Pre-Burst
Recording (P116)
Focus (Lights green.) (P39)/
Recording state (Lights red.)
(P163)
Focus (in low light AF
situations) (P86)
Focus (Starlight AF) (P86)
Connected to Wi-Fi
Connected to Bluetooth (P257)
Location Logging (P267)
Histogram (P218)
AFS
AFF AFC MF
AFS
BKT
A
F
L
LOW
STAR
3
Name
¢2
(P225)
Number of days that have passed since the
departure date
¢3
(P227)
Age
¢2
(P225)
Location
¢3
(P227)
Current date and time/
Travel destination setting
¢3
: (P227)
Exposure meter (P220)
Focal distance display (P150)
Step zoom (P150)
4
Image being sent (P266)
AF area (P95)
Spot metering target (P198)
Center marker display (P218)
Self-timer (P136)
Sound Rec level display (P173)
Sound Rec Level Limiter (OFF)
(P173)
Silent Mode (P203)
External Microphone (P288)
AE Lock (P103)
Metering Mode (P50, 198)
Program Shift (P67)
F3.5
Aperture value (P39)
Aperture Bracket (P139)
60
Shutter speed (P39)
Exposure compensation value
(P104)
Exposure Bracket (P138)
Brightness (P65, 85)
Manual Exposure Assistance
(P70)
ISO sensitivity (P106)
LMT
OFF
A
E
L
AE
F3.5
BKT
BKT
12. Materials
292
¢1 h: hour, m: minute, s: second
¢2 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile Setup]
setting is set.
¢3 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock
and after switching from Playback Mode to Recording Mode.
5
White Balance Bracket (P140)
White Balance Fine Adjustment
(P110)
White Balance (P108)
Color (P65)
98
Number of recordable pictures
(P317)
r20
Maximum number of pictures
that can be taken continuously
(P113)
Available recording time
¢1
(P317)
----
No card
BKT
AWB
AWBc
A
WBw
1
1
R 8
m
30
s
6
Touch tab (P216)
Touch zoom (P151)
Touch Shutter (P49)
Touch AF (P49)
Touch AE (P50)
Peaking (P217)
Fn button (P56)
/
/
(P174)/
(P179)
Color (P65)
Defocus control function
(P65, 85)
Brightness (P65, 85)
Type of defocus ([Miniature
Effect]) (P82)
One point color (P82)
Position of the light source
(P83)
Filter effect adjustment (P85,
196)
Filter on/off (P196)
Filter setting (P196)
Aperture value (P174)
Shutter speed (P174)
Exposure compensation
(P174, 179)
ISO sensitivity (P174)
Sound Rec level adjustment
(P174)
S&Q Effect (P179)
AF
AE
Fn4
MINIMINI
F
SS
ISO
293
12. Materials
On-monitor recording information
¢ m: minute, s: second
1
Recording Mode (P40)
Motion picture recording mode
(P163)
F3.5
Aperture value (P39)
1/60
Shutter speed (P39)
Battery indication (P27)
Power is being supplied (P26)
2
ISO sensitivity (P106)
Exposure compensation value
(P104)
Manual Exposure Assistance
(P70)
Flash Mode (P156)
Flash (P158, 160)
AWB
0 0
0
98
ISO
AUTO
OFF
L
4:3
AFS
AFS
1/60 F3.5
Fn
ISO
AUTO
0
0
3
Single (P111)
Burst (P112)
4K Photo (P115)
Post Focus (P126)
Self-timer (P136)
Focus Mode (P88, 100)
AF Mode (P90)
Quality (P193)
Recording quality (P165)
Aspect Ratio (P192)/
Picture size (P192)
S&Q Effect (P180)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection
state (P254)
Fn button setting (P56)
4
Photo Style (P194)
White Balance (P108)
Intelligent Dynamic Range
Control (P199)
Metering Mode (P198)
98
Number of recordable pictures
(P317)
r20
Maximum number of pictures
that can be taken continuously
(P113)
Available recording time
¢
(P317)
----
No card
AFS
60
p
L
4:3
Fn
AWB
R
8
m
30
s
12. Materials
294
In playback
1
Playback Mode (P239)
Protected picture (P240)
Location Logging (P267)
¿
3
Rating (P240)
Motion picture playback (P183)
Save pictures from the 4K burst file
(P121)
Saving pictures from a Post-Focus
image (P128)
Stamped with text indication (P248)
Elapsed playback time
¢1
(P183)
2
Icon indicating the presence of a
marker (P122, 124)
4K Photo (4K burst file) (P115)
Post Focus (P126)
Focus Stacking (P129)
Aspect Ratio (P192)/
Picture size (P192)
Recording quality (P165)
Snap Movie (P170)
Quality (P193)
S&Q Effect (P180)
Battery indication (P27)
Power is being supplied (P26)
Battery Grip (P286)
F3.5
F3.5
F3.560
60
60
0
0
AWB
AWB
AWB
1/98
1/98
1/98
2
00
00
2
00
2
00
9
pic.
pic.
9
pic.
L
4:3
3
3
8
m
30
s
L
4:3
60
p
1/98
Picture number/Total pictures
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state
Number of group pictures
Motion picture recording time
¢1
(P183)
S&Q playback time/recording time
¢1
(P180)
3
Clear Retouch completed icon
(P247)
Currently retrieving information icon
Playback (Motion Pictures) (P183)
Group images (P187)
Silent Mode (P203)
Number of days that have passed
since the departure date (P227)
Thumbnail display (P185)
Delete (P189)
Send Image (Smartphone) (P271)
SLF
8
m
30
s
67'$<
12. Materials
296
Detailed information display Histogram display
Photo style, Highlight shadow display White balance display
Lens information display
s
RGB
1/5
AFS
200
L
4:3
100-0001
5500
0
ISOISO
0
60
F3.5
2025.12. 1 10:00
1
STD.
2/5
200
100-0001
ISOISO
0
60
F3.5
2025.12. 1 10:00
R
Y
B
G
3/5
200
100-0001
ISO
ISO
0
60
F3.5
2025.12. 1 10:00
4/5
200
100-0001
ISOISO
0
2025.12. 1 10:00
F3.5
5500K
G
M
AB
1
60
5/5
200
100-0001
ISO
ISO
0
60
F3.5
2025.12. 1 10:00
1
Recording information (basic)
2
Recorded date (P35)
3
Folder/File number (P282)
4
Recording information (advanced)
297
12. Materials
Message Display
Meanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and response methods.
∫ Card
• It is a format that cannot be used with the camera.
Either insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting. (P30)
• Use a card compatible with the camera. (P30)
• Unable to access the card. Reinsert the card.
• Insert a different card.
• Failure to read or write data.
Turn off the camera, reinsert the card, and then turn it on again.
• The card may be broken.
• Insert a different card.
• Insufficient card write speed. Use a card of a supported Speed Class. (P30)
• If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the specified Speed Class
rating, the data writing speed of the card is getting slow.
We recommend backing up data, and formatting (P30).
• Depending on the type of card, recording may stop part way.
[Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?]
[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]
[Insert SD card again]/[Try another card]
[Read Error]/[Write Error]/[Please check the card]
[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card]
12. Materials
298
∫ Lens
• Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release button. (P31)
Turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
• Remove the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and the
camera body using a dry cotton swab.
Attach the lens, turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
∫ Battery
• Use a genuine Panasonic battery.
If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used, contact the
dealer.
• If the terminal of the battery is dirty, remove the dirt and dust from them.
∫ Others
• Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted.
Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (P30)
• Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be edited.
• The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot be created.
Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (P30)
After formatting, execute [No.Reset] in the [Setup] menu to reset the folder number to 100.
(P234)
• Turn off and on the camera.
If the message is displayed even when doing this several times, contact the dealer.
[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button while lens is
attached.]
[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached correctly.]
[This battery cannot be used]
[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be deleted]
[Cannot be set on this picture]
[A folder cannot be created]
[Please turn camera off and then on again]/[System Error]
299
12. Materials
Troubleshooting
First, try out the following procedures (P299 to P306).
• Charging is being performed in a place with extremely high or low temperature.
– Reconnect the USB connection cable and retry charging in a place where ambient
temperature is 10 °C to 30 °C (50 oF to 86 oF) (temperature conditions also apply to the
battery itself).
• Charging is not possible if the power supply capacity of the computer is low.
• The battery is exhausted. Charge the battery. (P22)
• [Power Save Mode] is enabled. (P229)
• When [4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster.
Set these settings only when recording.
• When connected to Wi-Fi, the battery drains quickly.
Turn the camera off frequently such as by using [Power Save Mode]. (P229)
• When the ambient temperature is high, the temperature of the camera will rise.
To protect the camera against a rise in temperature, after [ ] is displayed, recording will be
stopped, and the following functions will not be available for a time.
Wait until the camera cools down.
–[4K PHOTO]
–Post Focus
– Motion picture recording
– Power supply via the USB connection cable
If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting [Reset] (P234) on
the [Setup] menu.
Power, Battery
The charging lamp blinks.
Camera does not work even if the camera is turned on.
Camera switches off as soon as the camera is turned on.
The camera turns off automatically.
The battery becomes flat too quickly.
Recording
Recording stops before finishing.
Cannot record.
Cannot use some functions.
12. Materials
300
• If [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [FOCUS], then recording will not take place until focus is
achieved. (P213)
• Images may look whitish when the lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or similar.
If the lens is dirty, turn the camera off, then wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry cloth.
For information about how to clean the image sensor, refer to P308.
• Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (P103)
• When drive mode is set to [ ] (Burst), pressing and holding the shutter button will take burst
pictures. (P111)
• When bracketing is set, then pressing the shutter button records multiple images while
automatically changing the settings. (P137)
• Confirm the following details:
– Is the subject outside of the focus range?
– Is [Shutter AF] set to [OFF]? (P211)
– Is [Focus/Release Priority] set to [RELEASE]? (P213)
– Is AF Lock (P103) set where it is not appropriate?
• If there are fingerprints or dirt on the lens, the focus may be set to the lens and, as a result, the
subject may not be brought into focus.
• The shutter speed will become slower and the stabilizer function may not work properly when
recording in dark places.
In these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording.
• Try the following:
– Reduce the ISO sensitivity. (P106)
– Increase [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to the positive direction, or adjust each item other
than [Noise Reduction] to the negative direction. (P195)
– Set [Long Shtr NR] to [ON]. (P201)
Cannot record images.
The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is pressed.
The recorded image is whitish.
The recorded image is too bright or dark.
Multiple images are recorded at once.
The subject is not focused properly.
The recorded image is blurred.
The stabilizer is not effective.
The recorded image looks rough.
Noise appears on the picture.
301
12. Materials
• When a moving subject is recorded while using the following functions, the subject may appear
distorted in the picture:
– [ESHTR]
– Motion picture recording
–[4K PHOTO]
This is a characteristic of the MOS sensor that is the image sensor of the camera, and is not a
malfunction.
• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s
pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
• When using the electronic shutter (P203), lowering the shutter speed
may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
• If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when recording motion
picture, this can be mitigated by fixing the shutter speed.
Either set [Flkr Decrease] (P207), or record in Creative Video Mode (P174).
• Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.
Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (P106)
• When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture, etc., increasing the shutter speed
may introduce slight changes to brightness or coloring.
These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a malfunction.
• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting,
LED lighting fixture, mercury lamp, sodium lighting, etc., the coloring or screen brightness may
change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.
• Pixels may be missing from the image sensor.
Perform [Pixel Refresh]. (P235)
The subject appears distorted on the image.
Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and
LED lighting fixture.
Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.
The brightness or coloring of the recorded image is different from the actual
scene.
Bright spot not in subject is recorded.
12. Materials
302
• When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after turning on the
camera.
• Recording motion picture using the SD card requires an SD card of a supported speed class.
Use a compatible SD card. (P30)
• This may occur when taking a picture by reducing the AF speed in order to adjust the focus at
high precision. This is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the recording conditions or the lens used, the sound of aperture and focus
actions may be recorded in motion pictures.
You can set the focus operation during motion picture recording to [OFF] in [Continuous AF]
(P167).
• Do not block the microphone hole during motion picture recording.
• We recommend setting the Creative Video Mode and recording with touch operation if you are
bothered about the operation sounds during recording. (P174)
• When you are using a [Photo Style] setting which uses an adjusted gamma curve, such as
[V-Log L], the camera may incorrectly detect noise on images as contrast and indicate it with
Peaking. We recommend checking focus with MF Assist before recording.
• This camera records motion pictures in 4:2:0/8 bit, so luminance and color unevenness or
noise may appear in areas such as blue skies, people's skin, and white walls.
We recommend performing trial recording in advance and editing and checking post-production
images before proceeding to actual recording.
Motion pictures
Cannot record motion pictures.
Motion picture recording stops in the middle.
Sometimes focus adjustment with AF mode is difficult while recording 4K
motion pictures.
In motion pictures, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.
The recorded audio is very quiet.
An operation sound is recorded in a motion picture.
Parts that are not in focus are indicated with Peaking.
When motion pictures recorded with the Photo Style set to [V-Log L] are edited
post-production, luminance and color unevenness or noise appears.
303
12. Materials
• Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera.
• Set [Playback Mode] to [Normal Play]. (P239)
• If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] (P229) is
activated, and the Monitor/Viewfinder turns off.
• When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the Monitor display may switch
to the Viewfinder display.
• This occurs when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or when the subject brightness
changes, making the lens aperture change.
This is not a malfunction.
• When the camera is connected to a PC, it is not possible to switch to the viewfinder display.
• The viewfinder of the camera is built with OLED components. Screen burn-in may occur on the
screen/viewfinder when a same image is displayed for a long period of time, but it does not
affect the recorded images.
• This is characteristic of the viewfinder of the camera and not a malfunction.
It does not affect the recorded images.
Playback
Cannot play back.
There are no recorded pictures.
Monitor/Viewfinder
The monitor/viewfinder turns off when the camera is turned on.
It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change
significantly for an instant.
Cannot switch between the monitor and viewfinder even when [LVF] is pressed.
Unevenly bright parts or irregular colors appear on the viewfinder.
The coloring of the viewfinder differs from the actual tone.
12. Materials
304
• Open the flash if it is closed. (P152)
• The flash does not fire when [ ] (forced flash off) is selected. (P156, 157)
• Move the connected device, a smartphone, for example, closer to the camera and try
communication. (The communication range can vary greatly depending on the usage
environment, etc.)
• Usage near devices that utilize the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens and cordless
telephones may result in the radio wave being lost.
Use the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.
• When the connected device, a smartphone, for example, is connected to a wireless access
point other than this camera, connection with this camera is not possible. Change the Wi-Fi
settings on the connected device, a smartphone, for example, to make this camera the
connected access point.
• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or maintain
communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely affected. In
such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection.
Move the camera away from the metal surface.
• From the Wi-Fi setting menu on the smartphone, turn off and then on the Wi-Fi function.
• Is the size of the image too large?
– Reduce the image size at [Size] (P275), and then send.
– Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide] (P251).
• File format of images that can be sent (P266, 269)
• Reset network settings. (P235)
However, all information set in [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] will also be reset.
Flash
The flash does not fire.
Wi-Fi Function
A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.
Radio waves get disconnected.
The camera is not displayed in the Wi-Fi setting screen of the smartphone.
Transmission of the image fails midway.
Some images cannot be transmitted.
I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.
305
12. Materials
• Confirm the connection with the TV. (P278)
• Set the TV input to HDMI input.
• Check that the [VIERA Link] of the camera is set to [ON]. (P232)
• Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.
• Turn off and on the camera.
• Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)]. (P231)
• Turn the camera off and on.
• Check if your PC supports SDXC memory cards.
• When connecting the camera to the PC, a message recommending that the card be formatted
may be displayed. Do not format the card.
• If the [Access] displayed on the monitor does not disappear, turn off the camera and disconnect
the USB connection cable, and then connect again.
TV, PC
No image on the TV.
The TV screen is blurry or not colored.
VIERA Link is not working.
Cannot communicate with the PC.
The card is not recognized by the PC.
(SDXC memory card is used.)
12. Materials
306
• The sound is caused by the in-body stabilizer. This is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the lens you attach, it may move inside and create a sound. This is not a
malfunction.
• The lens movement and aperture operation emit sound when turning the camera on or off; this
is not a malfunction.
• This is the sound of aperture operation when brightness changes; this is not a malfunction.
• In dark places, the AF Assist Lamp (P212) lights red to make it easier to focus on a subject.
• Reselect the language from the menu using the following procedure:
• During use, the camera may get warm, but this does not affect performance or quality.
• When the camera is left for a long time, the clock may reset.
Reset the clock. (P35)
Others
When I shake the camera, I hear a rattling sound from the camera.
When I shake the camera, I hear a rattling sound from the attached lens.
There is a sound from the lens unit.
A red lamp sometimes lights when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
An unreadable language was selected by mistake.
> [Setup] > [] > Select desired language (P232)
The camera becomes warm.
The clock is wrong.
MENU
307
12. Materials
Cautions for Use
Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as
microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may be
disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely affecting
the pictures and/or sound.
• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields
created by speakers or large motors.
• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures and/or
sound.
• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning properly,
turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then reinsert the battery or
reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.
• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/or sound
may be adversely affected.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.
Do not keep objects such as credit cards that may be influenced magnetically close
to this unit. The data on these objects may become corrupted and unusable.
Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.
• If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be damaged and the
surface finish may peel off.
Do not keep rubber or plastic products in contact with the camera for a long period
of time.
Optimal use of the camera
12. Materials
308
Before cleaning, remove the battery and disconnect the power plug from the
electrical outlet. Then wipe the camera with a dry, soft cloth.
• When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung wet cloth,
and then with a dry cloth.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to clean the
camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel off.
• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.
∫ About dirt on the image sensor
If dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the recording conditions,
it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on the recorded picture.
To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid changing the lens in
a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a lens when storing the camera.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
Dust reduction function
The camera has a dust reduction function that will blow off the dirt and dust that have
affixed to the front of the image sensor.
If the dirt is particularly noticeable, from the [Setup] menu, perform [Sensor Cleaning].
Removing dirt on the image sensor
The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the following when
you do have to clean it yourself.
• Blow dust off the surface of the image sensor using a commercially available blower.
Do not blow the dust off with excessive power.
• Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount.
• Do not let the blower brush touch the image sensor as the image sensor may get scratched.
• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.
• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or Panasonic.
∫ Cleaning the Viewfinder
When the viewfinder becomes dirty, blow dirt off the surface of the viewfinder using a
commercially available blower, then lightly wipe with a dry cloth.
• The eye cup is a built-in component, so be careful not to remove it.
• If you wipe the eye cup too hard and it is removed, consult the dealer or Panasonic.
Cleaning
309
12. Materials
• Do not push hard on the monitor.
This may cause irregular coloration or malfunction.
• If the camera is cold when you turn it on, the picture on the Monitor/Viewfinder will be slightly
darker than usual at first. However, the picture will return to normal brightness when the internal
temperature of the camera increases.
• Do not push hard on the lens surface.
• Do not aim the lens at the sun or strong light sources.
The concentrated light may cause fire or damage.
• Do not allow strong light beams, such as laser light, to be directly exposed to this camera
(lens). These can destroy the image sensor and cause the camera to malfunction.
• Soiling on the lens surface (water, oil, fingerprints, etc.) may impact image quality.
Before and after use, lightly wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry cloth.
• When the camera is not being used, attach the lens cap and lens rear cap to prevent dust and
dirt from adhering to or entering the camera.
• To protect the lens contact points
A
, do not do the following.
These may cause a malfunction.
– Touch the lens contact points.
– Soil the lens contact points.
– Place the lens with its mount surface facing down.
• To improve the dust and splash resistant performance of the
interchangeable lens (H-FS12060/H-FSA14140), a lens mount rubber is
used in the mount.
– The lens mount rubber will leave scuff marks on the digital camera mount, but this does not
impact performance.
– To replace the lens mount rubber, contact Panasonic.
Monitor/Viewfinder
Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the Monitor/
Viewfinder screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or
green) on the screen. This is not a malfunction. Though the Monitor/Viewfinder
screen parts are produced with highly controlled precision technology, some
pixels may be inactive or always lit. The spots will not be recorded on pictures
on a card.
Lens
12. Materials
310
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.
It is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on performance increases
as the temperature rises or drops.
Keep the contacts A of the charger and battery clean.
• Wipe them with a dry cloth if they get dirty.
Always remove the battery after use.
• Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, and store or keep away from
metallic objects (clips, etc.).
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the
battery and the contacts are deformed.
• Damage to the camera will result if a battery with deformed contacts is inserted into the
camera.
Dispose of unusable battery.
• The battery has a limited life.
• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.
Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects (such as
necklaces, hairpins, etc.).
• This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if you touch a
battery.
Do not leave the card in areas with high temperatures, direct sunlight, or areas
prone to electromagnetic waves and static.
Do not bend or drop the card.
Do not subject the card to strong vibration.
• Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.
• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or carrying the
card.
• Do not allow dirt, water or other foreign objects to get into the contacts on the card.
Additionally, do not touch the contacts with your hands.
Battery
Card
311
12. Materials
Personal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images.
We recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi function lock to protect
personal information. (P276)
• Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as recording dates
and times, and location information.
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, likeness rights, etc. of a subject and take
your own responsibility when you use the [Silent Mode], or use functions such as
writing the location information and changing the shutter noise, etc.
• Avoid using passwords that may be easily guessed by someone else, such as birthdays, etc.
• Use a different password to the passwords you have used for services provided by other
companies.
Disclaimer
• Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to erroneous
operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or indirect damage
from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal information.
When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera
• After making a copy of personal information, be sure to delete information, including personal
information, such as wireless LAN connection settings that you have registered or saved within
the camera with [Reset Network Settings]. (P235)
• Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (P234)
• Remove the card from the camera.
• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above operations
are not possible due to malfunction.
Points to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card
Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management
information, so it will not delete the data in the card completely.
We recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available PC data
deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/transferring the
card.
You are responsible for handling of data on cards.
About the personal information
12. Materials
312
• Ensure you remove the battery and card from the camera.
When the battery is left inserted in the camera, a small amount of current will always flow even
if the camera is turned off.
If the battery is left in the camera, it may over-discharge, and be rendered unusable even after
charging.
• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature.
(Recommended temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF); recommended humidity: 40 %RH
to 60 %RH)
• If storing for a long period of time, it is recommended that the battery be charged once per year,
fully drained in the camera, then removed from the camera and then stored again.
• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a closet or
a cabinet.
• Check all the parts before recording when you have not used the camera for a long period of
time.
• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate
handling.
Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.
• Make sure the tripod is stable when the camera is attached to it.
• When using a tripod or unipod, removal of the battery may not be possible.
• Make sure that the screw on the tripod or unipod is not at an angle when attaching or removing
the tripod or unipod.
Using excessive force may damage the camera tripod mount.
Also, care is required because tightening the screw excessively may damage the camera, or
cause the rating label to come off.
• When using this unit with a large-diameter lens, the lens may come into contact with the
pedestal depending on the tripod/unipod. Tightening the screw with the lens and pedestal in
contact with each other may damage this unit or the lens. Therefore it is recommended to
attach the tripod adaptor (DMW-TA1: optional) before mounting on the tripod/unipod.
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the tripod or unipod.
• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens to the camera body, do not carry the camera by the
shoulder strap.
Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.
When not using the camera for a long period of time
Image Data
Tripods or unipods
Shoulder Strap
313
12. Materials
∫ Use the camera as a wireless LAN device
When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than
wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs
and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any
damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN
device.
∫ Use of the Wi-Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where this
camera is sold
There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in countries
other than those where this camera is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for any
violations.
∫ There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted by a third party.
∫ Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or
interference
• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference, such as
near microwave ovens. These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.
• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones that use the
2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both devices.
Wi-Fi function
12. Materials
314
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and
Available Recording Time with the Battery
Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time lengths available
for recording when the supplied battery is being used.
• The numbers of recordable pictures listed here are based on the CIPA (Camera & Imaging
Products Association) standard.
• Using a Nextorage SDXC memory card.
• The values listed are approximate.
∫ Recording still pictures (when using the Monitor)
∫ Recording still pictures (when using the Viewfinder)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Time] in [Power Save
LVF Shooting] is set to [1SEC] and the [Power Save LVF Shooting] function works as
intended. (Based on the test conditions derived from the CIPA standard and specified by
Panasonic)
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Number of pictures that can be taken Approx. 280 pictures
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Number of pictures that can be taken Approx. 300 pictures (Approx. 1050 pictures)
315
12. Materials
∫ Recording motion pictures (when using the monitor) (DC-G97P/DC-G97PP)
Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/20M/30p].
Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/28M/60p].
Recording with picture quality set to [4K/100M/30p].
• Actual recordable time is the time available for recording when repeating actions such as
turning this unit on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
∫ Recording motion pictures (when using the monitor) (DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/
DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN)
Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/20M/25p].
Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/28M/50p].
Recording with picture quality set to [4K/100M/25p].
• Actual recordable time is the time available for recording when repeating actions such as
turning this unit on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 110 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 55 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 100 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 50 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 90 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 45 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 110 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 55 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 100 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 50 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 90 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 45 min
12. Materials
316
∫ Playback (when using the monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Playback time Approx. 190 min
• The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the
environment and the operating conditions.
For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of
recordable pictures is reduced.
– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
– When flash is used repeatedly.
• When the operating time of the camera becomes extremely short even immediately after
charging, the life of the battery has expired. Replace with a new battery.
317
12. Materials
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and
Video Recording Time with Cards
Listed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos that can be
recorded on a card.
• The values listed are approximate.
∫ Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken
• Aspect ratio [4:3], Quality [ ]
• Aspect ratio [4:3], Quality [ ]
∫ Video Recording Time (DC-G97P/DC-G97PP)
• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
• Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded.
[Picture Size]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB 256 GB
L (20M) 2910 5550 11180 22380
M (10M) 5280 10040 20220 40110
S (5M) 9220 16860 33950 64170
[Picture Size]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB 256 GB
L (20M) 900 1730 3490 7020
M (10M) 1050 2010 4060 8150
S (5M) 1150 2190 4420 8830
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB 256 GB
[4K/100M/30p]
[4K/100M/24p]
41m00s 1h20m 2h45m 5h35m
[FHD/28M/60p] 2h25m 4h50m 9h45m 19h55m
[FHD/20M/30p] 3h15m 6h25m 13h05m 26h35m
[HD/10M/30p] 6h20m 12h20m 25h00m 50h45m
12. Materials
318
∫ Video Recording Time (DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN)
• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
• Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded.
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB 256 GB
[4K/100M/30p]
[4K/100M/25p]
[4K/100M/24p]
41m00s 1h20m 2h45m 5h35m
[FHD/28M/60p]
[FHD/28M/50p]
2h25m 4h50m 9h45m 19h55m
[FHD/20M/30p]
[FHD/20M/25p]
3h15m 6h25m 13h05m 26h35m
[HD/10M/30p]
[HD/10M/25p]
6h20m 12h20m 25h00m 50h45m
• Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, the number of recordable
pictures and available recording time vary.
• [9999i] is displayed on the recording screen if there are 10000 or more recordable pictures
remaining.
• [99h59m] is displayed on the recording screen if there are 100 hours or more motion picture
recording time remaining.
• When the size of [Rec Quality] is [FHD]/[HD]:
Files will be split up and saved and played back as smaller files if the continuous recording
time exceeds 30 minutes or the file size exceeds 4 GB. (You can continue recording without
interruption.)
• When the size of [Rec Quality] is [4K]:
Files will be split up and saved and played back as smaller files in the following cases.
(You can continue recording without interruption.)
When using an SDHC memory card:
If the file size exceeds 4 GB
When using an SDXC memory card:
If the continuous recording time exceeds 3 hours and 4 minutes or the file size exceeds
96 GB
• The maximum available continuous recording time is displayed on the screen.
319
12. Materials
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each
Recording Mode
Menu
P A S M
[Rec] menu
[Aspect Ratio]
[Picture Size]
[Quality]
[AFS/AFF]
[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]
[Photo Style]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect]
[Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter]
[Color Space]
[Metering Mode]
[Highlight Shadow]
[i.Dynamic]
[i.Resolution]
[Flash]
[Firing Mode]
[Flash Mode]
[Flash Synchro]
[Flash Adjust.]
[Auto Exposure
Comp.]
[Manual Flash
Adjust.]
[Wireless]
[Wireless Channel]
[Wireless FP]
[Communication
Light]
[Wireless Setup]
12. Materials
320
Menu
P A S M
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower
Limit Setting]
[ISO Auto Upper
Limit Setting]
[Min. Shtr Speed]
[Long Shtr NR]
[Shading Comp.]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
[I.S. Lock (Video)]
[Focal Length Set]
[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])
[Digital Zoom]
[Burst Rate]
[4K PHOTO]
[Rec Method]
[Pre-Burst
Recording]
[Loop Recording(4K
PHOTO)]
[Self Timer]
[Time Lapse/Animation]
[Live View Composite]
[Silent Mode]
[Shutter Type]
[Shutter Delay]
[Bracket]
[HDR]
[Multi Exp.]
[Auto Gain]
[Overlay]
321
12. Materials
Menu
P A S M
[Motion Picture] Menu
[Rec Quality]
[Snap Movie]
[AFS/AFF]
[Continuous AF]
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
[Photo Style]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect]
[Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter]
[Luminance Level]
[Metering Mode]
[Highlight Shadow]
[i.Dynamic]
[i.Resolution]
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower
Limit Setting]
[ISO Auto Upper
Limit Setting]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
[I.S. Lock (Video)]
[Focal Length Set]
[Flkr Decrease]
[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture])
[Digital Zoom]
[Picture Mode in Rec.]
12. Materials
322
¢1 This item is available only when using an external microphone (optional).
¢2 This item is available only when using an interchangeable lens supporting power zoom.
¢3 This item is available only when using stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2: optional).
Menu
P A S M
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]
[Wind Noise Canceller]
[Wind Cut]
¢1
[Lens Noise Cut]
¢2
[Special Mic.]
¢3
[Sound Output]
323
12. Materials
Specifications
The specifications are subject to change for performance enhancement.
Digital Camera Body (DC-G97):
Information for your safety
Power Source: 7.2 V
Power Consumption: 3.2 W (when recording with the monitor), 2.6 W (when playing
back with the monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060)]
3.3 W (when recording with the monitor), 2.6 W (when playing
back with the monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140)]
Type
Type Digital Single Lens Mirrorless camera
Lens mount Micro Four Thirds mount
Recording media SD memory card / SDHC memory card
¢1
/ SDXC memory card
¢1
¢1 Supports the UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3 (U3) standard
Image sensor
Image sensor 4/3q CMOS sensor, total pixel number approx. 21,800,000 pixels,
Primary color filter
Effective number of
pixels of the camera
Approx. 20,300,000 pixels
Latitude
12 stops ([V-Log L])
12. Materials
324
Recording format for still images
File format for still
images
JPEG (based on “Design rule for Camera File system”, based on
“Exif 2.31” standard) / RAW
File format for 4K
photos
MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC (2 ch))
Picture size
(pixels)
When the aspect ratio setting is [4:3]
[L]: 5184k3888
[M]: 3712k2784
[S]: 2624k1968
4K photo: 3328k2496
When the aspect ratio setting is [3:2]
[L]: 5184k3456
[M]: 3712k2480
[S]: 2624k1752
4K photo: 3504k2336
When the aspect ratio setting is [16:9]
[L]: 5184k2920
[M]: 3840k2160
[S]: 1920k1080
4K photo: 3840k2160
When the aspect ratio setting is [1:1]
[L]: 3888k3888
[M]: 2784k2784
[S]: 1968k1968
4K photo: 2880k2880
Image quality for
pictures
RAW / RAWiFine / RAWiStandard / Fine / Standard
Recording format for motion picture
Video format MP4: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC
Audio compression
format
MP4: AAC (2 ch)
Image quality for
motion pictures
Refer to the “[Rec Quality]” pages for information about resolution,
recording frame rate, and other elements of recording quality.
(P165)
325
12. Materials
Viewfinder
Type Aspect ratio 4:3, 0.39 inches,
approx. 2,360,000 dots, OLED Live Viewfinder
Field of view ratio About 100 %
Magnification Approx. 1.48k, approx. 0.74k (35 mm film camera equivalent),
with 50 mm lens at infinity; j1.0 m
j1
, When the aspect ratio
setting is [4:3]
Eye point Approx. 20 mm (at j1.0 m
j1
)
Diopter adjustment
range
j4 to i4diopter
Eye sensor Yes
Monitor
Type Aspect ratio 3:2, 3.0 inches,
approx. 1,840,000 dots monitor, capacitive touch screen
Field of view ratio About 100 %
Focus
Auto focus type TTL type based on image detection (Contrast AF)
Focus mode AFS / AFF / AFC / MF
AF mode Face/Eye Detection / Tracking / 49-area-focusing / Custom Multi /
1-area-focusing / Pinpoint
(Focus area selection is possible by touching)
Exposure control
Light metering
system,
Light metering mode
1728-zone multi-pattern sensing system, Multiple / Center
weighted / Spot
Metering range EV 0 to EV 18 (F2.0 lens, ISO100 conversion)
Exposure Program AE (P) / Aperture-priority AE (A) / Shutter-priority AE (S) /
Manual exposure (M)
Exposure
compensation
1/3 EV Step, d5EV
ISO sensitivity
(standard output
sensitivity)
Pictures:
AUTO / / 100
¢2
/ 200 / 400 / 800 / 1600 / 3200 / 6400 /
12800 / 25600
Creative Video:
AUTO / 100
¢2
/ 200 / 400 / 800 / 1600 / 3200 / 6400
¢2 When [Extended ISO] is set
• 1 EV step (1/3 EV step change possible)
12. Materials
326
Image stabilizer
Image stabilizer type Compliant with Image sensor shift type, 5-axis stabilizer, Dual I.S.2
Image stabilizer effect In-body image stabilizer: 5.0 stops
[Focal length f=60 mm (35 mm conversion f=120 mm), When
using the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060)]
Dual I.S.2: 5.0 stops
[Focal length f=140 mm (35 mm conversion f=280 mm), When
using the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140)]
(Based on the CIPA standard, Yaw/Pitch direction)
White balance
White balance mode AWB / AWBc / AWBw / Daylight / Cloudy / Shade / Incandescent
lights / Flash / White set 1, 2, 3, 4 / Color temperature 1, 2, 3, 4
Shutter
Shutter type Focal-plane shutter
Shutter speed Pictures:
Mechanical shutter: Bulb (Max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds
to 1/4000 of a second,
Electronic front curtain: Bulb (Max. approx. 30 minutes),
60 seconds to 1/2000 of a second,
Electronic shutter: 1 second to 1/16000 of a second
Motion picture:
1/25 of a second
¢3
to 1/16000 of a second
¢3 When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M] in Creative Video mode
and focus mode is set to [MF], this can be set up to 1/2 of a
second
Burst recording
Mechanical shutter /
Electronic front
curtain
9 pictures/second (High speed, AFS/MF)
¢4
6 pictures/second (High speed, AFF/AFC)
¢4
6 pictures/second (Middle speed)
2 pictures/second (Low speed)
¢4 When using the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060)
Electronic shutter 9 pictures/second (High speed, AFS/MF)
6 pictures/second (High speed, AFF/AFC)
6 pictures/second (Middle speed)
2 pictures/second (Low speed)
Maximum number of
frames recordable
With RAW file: 27 frames or more (When recording is performed
under the test conditions specified by Panasonic)
Without RAW file: 600 frames or more (Using an SDXC memory
card compliant with UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3, When recording
is performed under the test conditions specified by Panasonic)
327
12. Materials
Minimum illumination
With camera models DC-G97P/DC-G97PP:
Approx. 9 lx (when i-Low light is used, the shutter speed is 1/30 of a second)
(When the Interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used)
Approx. 9 lx (when i-Low light is used, the shutter speed is 1/30 of a second)
(When the Interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is used)
With camera models DC-G97E/DC-G97GC/DC-G97GW/DC-G97GN:
Approx. 9 lx (when i-Low light is used, the shutter speed is 1/25 of a second)
(When the Interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used)
Approx. 9 lx (when i-Low light is used, the shutter speed is 1/25 of a second)
(When the Interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is used)
Flash
Flash TTL AUTO Built-in pop up flash GN 9.0 equivalent (ISO200·m)
(GN 6.4 equivalent (ISO100·m))
Flash mode AUTO / AUTO/Red-Eye Reduction /
Forced ON / Forced ON/Red-Eye Reduction /
Slow Sync. / Slow Sync./Red-Eye Reduction /
Forced OFF
Flash synchronization
speed
Equal to or smaller than 1/200 of a second
Flash range Approx. 0.5 m (1.6 feet) to 7.3 m (24 feet)
(When the Interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is mounted, WIDE,
[ISO AUTO] is set)
Approx. 0.5 m (1.6 feet) to 7.3 m (24 feet)
(When the Interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is mounted, WIDE,
[ISO AUTO] is set)
Zoom
Digital zoom 2k / 4k
Extra tele conversion
(Photo)
Max. Approx. 2.0k ([Picture Size]: when [S] is selected)
Extra tele conversion
(Video)
Approx. 2.7k ([Rec Quality]: when [FHD] is selected)
Approx. 4.0k ([Rec Quality]: when [HD] is selected)
Microphone / Speaker
Microphone Stereo
Speaker Monaural
12. Materials
328
The symbols on this product (including the accessories) represent the following:
Interface
USB / CHARGE USB Type-C
®
, USB 2.0 (High Speed)
HDMI micro HDMI Type D
[REMOTE] ‰2.5 mm jack
[MIC] ‰3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Plug-in Power supported
Standard input level: −55 dBV (Mic Input)
Headphones ‰3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Splash Resistant
Yes
External dimensions / Mass (Weight)
External dimensions Approx. 130.4 mm (W)k93.5 mm (H)k77.4 mm (D)
(5.14q (W)k3.69q (H)k3.05q (D))
(excluding the projecting parts)
Mass (Weight) Approx. 530 g/1.17 lb
(camera body, with battery and card)
Approx. 478 g/1.06 lb (only camera body)
Operating environment
Recommended
operating temperature
0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)
Permissible relative
humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
Wi-Fi
Compliance standard IEEE 802.11b/g/n (standard wireless LAN protocol)
Frequency range used
(central frequency)
2412 MHz to 2462 MHz (1 to 11 ch)
Encryption method Wi-Fi compliant WPA
TM
/WPA2
TM
Access method Infrastructure mode
Bluetooth
Compliance standard Bluetooth v5.0, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE)
Frequency range used
(central frequency)
2402 MHz to 2480 MHz
DC
329
12. Materials
Interchangeable Lens
for digital camera
H-FS12060
“LUMIX G VARIO 12–60mm/F3.5–5.6 ASPH./POWER O.I.S.”
Mount Micro Four Thirds mount
Focal length f=12 mm to 60 mm
(35 mm film camera equivalent: 24 mm to 120 mm)
Lens construction 11 elements in 9 groups (3 aspherical lenses, 1 ED lens)
Aperture type 7 diaphragm blades/circular aperture diaphragm
Maximum aperture F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)
Minimum aperture value F22
Angle of view 84x (Wide) to 20x (Tele)
In focus distance Wide: 0.20 m (0.66 feet) to ¶ / Tele: 0.25 m (0.82 feet) to ¶ (from
the focus distance reference line)
Maximum image
magnification
0.27k (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.54k)
Optical image stabilizer Ye s
Filter diameter 58 mm
Maximum diameter ‰66 mm (2.6q)
Overall length Approx. 71 mm (2.8q)
(from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)
Mass (Weight) Approx. 210 g/0.46 lb
Dust and splash
resistant
Yes
Recommended
operating temperature
0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)
Permissible relative
humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
12. Materials
330
Interchangeable Lens
for digital camera
H-FSA14140
“LUMIX G VARIO 14–140mm/F3.5–5.6 II ASPH./POWER O.I.S.”
Mount Micro Four Thirds mount
Focal length f=14 mm to 140 mm
(35 mm film camera equivalent: 28 mm to 280 mm)
Lens construction 14 elements in 12 groups (3 aspherical lenses, 2 ED lenses)
Aperture type 7 diaphragm blades/circular aperture diaphragm
Maximum aperture F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)
Minimum aperture value F22
Angle of view 75x (Wide) to 8.8x (Tele)
In focus distance Wide: 0.30 m (0.98 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance reference
line) (focal length 14 mm to 21 mm)
Tele: 0.50 m (1.64 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance reference
line) (focal length 22 mm to 140 mm)
Maximum image
magnification
0.25k (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.5k)
Optical image stabiliser Yes
Filter diameter 58 mm
Maximum diameter ‰67 mm (2.6q)
Overall length Approx. 75 mm (3.0q)
(from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)
Mass (Weight) Approx. 265 g/0.58 lb
Dust and splash
resistant
Yes
Recommended
operating temperature
0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)
Permissible relative
humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
331
12. Materials
Trademarks and Licenses
• Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks
are trademarks or registered trademarks of OM Digital
Solutions Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the
European Union and other countries.
• “Nextorage” is a registered trademark or trademark of
Nextorage corporation.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, HDMI Trade dress and the HDMI Logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc.
• USB Type-C
®
and USB-C
®
are registered trademarks of
USB Implementers Forum.
• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Holdings
Corporation.
• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.
• Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Mac and macOS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries.
• App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
• Google, Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.
• The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Panasonic Holdings Corporation is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
•“Wi-Fi
®
” is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• “WPA™” and “WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
• Other names, company names, product names mentioned in this document are trademarks
or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.
332
12. Materials
This product incorporates the following software:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL V2.0),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version 2.1 (LGPL
V2.1), and/or
(5) open source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.0 and/or LGPL
V2.1.
The software categorized as (3) - (5) are distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Please refer to the detailed terms and conditions
thereof displayed by selecting [MENU/SET] > [Setup] > [Version Disp.] > [Software info].
At least three (3) years from delivery of this product, Panasonic will give to any third party who
contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of
physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code covered under GPL V2.0 or LGPL V2.1, as well as the respective
copyright notice thereof.
Contact Information: oss-cd-request@gg.jp.panasonic.com
The source code and the copyright notice are also available for free in our website below.
https://docs.connect.panasonic.com/oss/
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a
consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in
compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video
provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other
use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
∫ Ecodesign information
The following is Ecodesign information required by EU Commission Regulation.
• For guidance on how to activate and deactivate the wireless network port, see:
– 10. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth (P254)
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents
mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be
mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used
batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with
your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and
prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your local
authority.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance
with national legislation.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case
it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
DVQP3210~BCover_eng.fm 333 ページ ２０２５年３月３１日 月曜日 午後２時５７分
